JP5519828B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and more specifically, variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified based on the start condition being satisfied after the start condition is satisfied. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that includes variable display means having a plurality of variable display units, and controls a specific gaming state advantageous to a player after a variable display result of identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a display that can be changed by updating or scrolling predetermined identification information (hereinafter referred to as a display symbol) on a display device such as a liquid crystal display (hereinafter referred to as LCD). There are a number of games that have been enhanced by a so-called variable display game that performs (variable display) and determines whether or not to give a predetermined game value based on the display result (variable display result).

  As an example of the variable display game, the variable display of the display symbol is completely stopped based on the detection of the game ball passing through the starting winning opening (the variable display start condition is satisfied). In some cases, the case where the stop symbol mode (variable display result) is a specific display mode determined in advance is called “big hit”. In this variable display game, when it is a “big hit”, a special electric accessory called a big prize opening or an attacker is opened, and a state in which a game ball can be won extremely easily is provided to a player for a certain period of time. . Such a state is referred to as a “specific game state” or a “hit game state”. In addition, the predetermined variable display state that may be a “big hit” in the variable display game is “reach” (also referred to as “reach state”), and the variable display state of the display symbol is “reach” There are known gaming machines that perform various production operations.

  As such a gaming machine, for example, when a reach state is effect-displayed, a plurality of different reach patterns are switched and displayed, and a reach pattern is displayed between one reach pattern display and another reach pattern display. It has been suggested that the reach display section informs which reach pattern is displayed when switching (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2001-347004 A

  It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can execute various effects and improve the gaming interest.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention satisfies the start condition (for example, No determination in step S231) after the start condition (for example, determination of Yes in steps S201 and S210) is satisfied. Based on the above, variable display means (for example, the image display device 5) that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols) that can be individually identified is provided, and the variable display result of the identification information is predetermined. The game machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that is controlled to a specific gaming state (for example, the big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player after the specific display result (for example, a decisive decorative symbol of the big hit combination) is obtained. Whether or not to control to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied. Predetermining means for determining before the variable display result of information is derived and displayed (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S238 to S241 and S245 to S247), the determination result by the predetermining means and variable display Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variable display pattern type of the identification information is classified into a plurality of types of reach variable display pattern types that execute the reach effect and a plurality of types of non-reach that does not execute the reach effect. Variable display pattern type determining means for determining one of the variable display pattern types (for example, the CPU 103 executes one of the processes in steps S262, S264, S270, and S271, and then executes the processes in steps S272 and S273. Part), and the execution of the reach production , Based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining a variable display pattern, to determine one of a plurality of reach variable display patterns included in one reach variable display pattern type, while not performing the reach effect Correspondingly, variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of non-reach variable display patterns included in one non-reach variable display pattern type based on numerical data indicating random values for variable display pattern determination ( For example, the CPU 103 performs variable display of the identification information in accordance with the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means, and the variable display pattern is variable in reach. Production execution means (for example, performance) for executing the reach production when the display pattern is used. And the like. The production execution means includes a plurality of types of the reach production. The production execution means includes, for example, a part for executing the decorative symbol variation processing in step S162 based on the production control pattern determined in step S520. A reach selection effect for confirming and displaying one reach image of the plurality of types of reach images after sequentially displaying the reach image can be executed, and when the reach selection effect is executed, the reach selection effect is finished after the end. The reach effect indicated by the reach image that is confirmed and displayed in FIG. 80 is executed (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 determines Yes in step S514, it is illustrated in FIG. 80 or FIG. 83 in the decorative symbol variation process in step S162. And then the reach illustrated in FIG. 80 (F) and FIG. 83 (G). The variable display pattern type determination means performs a reach variable display pattern type (for example, a variation pattern type of Super CS2-1 or Super CS3-1) that executes the reach selection effect. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern type based on any one of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A, 132B, 132E, and 132F in step S273). , The variation pattern type is determined based on any one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C).
In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is configured such that the start condition (for example, determination of No in step S231) is satisfied after the start condition (for example, determination of Yes in steps S201 and S210) is satisfied. Based on this, variable display means (for example, the image display device 5) that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols, etc.) that can each be identified is provided, and the variable display result of the identification information is predetermined. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that controls to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player after a display result (for example, a decisive decorative pattern of the jackpot combination), Prior determination means (for example, determining whether to control to a specific gaming state before the variable display result of the identification information is derived and displayed) And the variable information display of the identification information based on the determination that the PU 103 is not controlled to the specific gaming state by the pre-determining means), and the part in which the PU 103 executes the processes of steps S238 to S241 and S245 to S247. Reach determination means for determining whether or not the state is set to a predetermined reach state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S265 to S269), a determination result by the prior determination means, and a determination by the reach determination means Based on the result, the variation pattern type determining means for determining the variation pattern type of the identification information as one of a plurality of types (for example, after the CPU 103 executes any of the processes of steps S262, S264, S270, and S271, Steps S272 and S273 for executing the processing) and the variation A variation pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern of the identification information from among the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type determined by the turn type determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S274 to S276); An effect execution means (for example, the effect control pattern determined by the effect control CPU 120 in step S520 based on the effect control pattern) that executes the effect operation corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern determination means during the variable display of the identification information. Etc.), and the effect executing means sequentially displays a plurality of types of reach images that are effect operations executed during the reach state, and then includes the plurality of types of reach images. Reach selection effect that confirms and displays one reach image can be executed. When the reach selection effect is executed, the reach effect indicated by the reach image determined and displayed in the reach selection effect is executed after the completion (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 determines Yes in step S514, The effect display as illustrated in FIG. 80 or FIG. 83 is executed in the decorative symbol variation process of S162, and then the reach effect shown by the reach image illustrated in FIG. 80 (F) or FIG. 83 (G). And the variation pattern type determination means determines that the prior determination means determines to control to the specific gaming state, or determines that the reach state is set to the reach state by the reach determination means. The change pattern type for executing the reach selection effect (for example, the change of super CS2-1 or super CS3-1) is performed. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern type based on one of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A, 132B, 132E, and 132F in step S273). And determination of the variation pattern type based on one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C).

(2) In the gaming machine described in the above (1), the effect execution means is an image used in the reach effect (for example, reach effect A to C, mountain reach effect, sea reach effect, space reach effect). The reach selection effect is executed by sequentially displaying the same reach image as the image to be used) (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs processing in the decorative symbol variation process of step S162, as shown in FIGS. ) And the effect display as exemplified in FIGS. 83 (A) to 83 (G)).

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), the effect executing means executes the reach selection effect by scroll-displaying the plurality of types of reach images (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control). (Execution display or the like as illustrated in FIGS. 80A to 80D is executed in the decorative symbol changing process in step S162).

(4) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), the effect execution unit executes the reach selection display by switching and displaying the plurality of types of reach images one by one (for example, The effect control CPU 120 executes effect display as exemplified in FIGS. 82 (A) to (G) in the decorative symbol changing process in step S162.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), further including operation means (for example, an operation button 30) that can be operated by a player, wherein the effect execution means includes the reach When a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means during execution of the selection effect (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 determines Yes in step S352), one of the plurality of types of reach images is reached. The image is confirmed and displayed (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control changes the design variation control pattern from the super CPS 6-1 to the super CPS 6-5-1 in the decorative design variation processing in step S162, thereby FIG. (E) Performs an effect display as exemplified in (E)).

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5), the variation pattern type for executing the reach selection effect corresponds to the type of reach effect to be performed after execution of the reach selection effect. A plurality of types of variation pattern types, wherein the variation pattern type determination means determines that the advance determination means controls to the specific gaming state, or the reach determination means sets the reach state as the reach state. When determining whether or not to execute the reach selection effect by determining any one of the plurality of types of variation pattern based on the determination to effect, when executing the reach selection effect Then, the type of reach effect to be performed after execution of the reach effect is determined (for example, the CPU 103 determines the big hit fluctuation parameter in step S273). Over determination and the emission type determination table 232A~232C and variation pattern type based on either 232E～232G, the like determination of the variation pattern based on either reach a fluctuation pattern type determination table 235A~235C type).

(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5), wherein the prior determination unit, the reach determination unit, the variation pattern type determination unit, and the variation pattern determination unit , Including game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, ROM 101, RAM 102, CPU 103, etc. of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11), the effect execution means, and the variable display means Effect control means for controlling the display state (for example, effect control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, etc. mounted on the effect control board 12), and the game control means is controlled by the variation pattern determining means. Command transmission means (for example, CPU 10) for transmitting the determined variation pattern (for example, variation pattern designation command). Includes a portion for executing the command control processing in step S17 based on the transmission setting in step S279, and the effect control means executes the reach selection effect based on the command from the command transmission means (for example, When the effect control CPU 120 determines Yes in step S514), the reach effect determining means for determining the type of reach effect performed after the reach selection effect is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S516). Etc.).

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7), the variation pattern type determination unit corresponds to the determination that the reach state is not set to the reach state by the reach determination unit. Then, during the variable display of the identification information, a variation pattern type (for example, non-slip), “pseudo train”, “main notice”, “development chance end”, etc. A plurality of types of variation patterns (for example, non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to Non-reach CC1-3, etc.) (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S271 after the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S271) The variation pattern determination means is determined that the reach determination means does not enter the reach state, and is determined by the variation pattern type determination means to be a variation pattern type for executing the specific effect. Correspondingly, the variation pattern of the identification information is determined as one of a plurality of types of non-reach variation patterns (for example, variation patterns of non-reach PA1-4 to PA1-7) for executing the specific effect. (For example, in response to the determination that the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 in step S273, after setting the loss variation pattern determination table 138A in step S274, The process of S276 is executed).

  The present invention has the following effects.

  According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, the variable display pattern type determining means determines that the variable display pattern type is one of a plurality of variable display pattern types including the variable display pattern type for executing the reach selection effect. Is done. Then, when the variable display pattern type for executing the reach selection effect is determined by the variable display pattern type determining unit, the variable display pattern determining unit sequentially displays a plurality of types of reach images and then displays one reach image. Thereafter, the variable display pattern for executing the reach effect indicated by the reach image that is determined and displayed is determined. In this way, when the reach selection effect is executed by determining the variable display pattern type after determining the variable display pattern type after determining whether or not to execute the reach selection effect. A variable display pattern suitable for the reach selection effect can be selected, and a variety of variable display patterns can be selected even when the reach selection effect is not executed. Therefore, a variety of effects can be executed to improve the game entertainment.

  In the gaming machine described in (2) above, since the reach image that is the same as the image used in the reach effect is used in the reach selection effect, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying which reach effect the player will develop. can do.

  In the gaming machine described in (3) above, since a plurality of types of reach images are scroll-displayed in the reach selection effect, the player may develop any reach effect during the execution of the reach selection effect. It becomes easy to grasp whether there is.

  In the gaming machine described in (4) above, since a plurality of types of reach images are switched and displayed one by one in the reach selection effect, the player develops what reach effect during the reach selection effect It will be easier to grasp what is likely to be.

  In the gaming machine described in the above (5), when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means during the execution of the reach selection effect, one reach image of the plurality of types of reach images is confirmed and displayed. Since it is possible to execute the reach selection effect as if the player is involved in the selection of the reach effect, it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

  In the gaming machine described in (6) above, the variation pattern type for executing the reach selection effect includes a plurality of types of variation pattern types corresponding to the types of reach effect performed after the execution of the reach selection effect. The variation pattern type determining means determines whether or not to execute the reach selection effect, and at the same time determines the type of reach effect that develops when the reach selection effect is executed. Thereby, without increasing the processing burden, it is possible to give variation to the reach production that develops from the reach selection production, and to improve the game entertainment.

  In the gaming machine described in (7) above, the reach effect determining means determines the type of reach effect that develops after execution of the reach select effect based on the command from the command transmitting means when executing the reach select effect. Thereby, without increasing the processing load of the game control means, it is possible to give a variation to the reach effect that develops from the reach selection effect and to improve the game entertainment.

  In the gaming machine described in (8) above, the variation pattern type determination unit performs a specific effect during variable display of the identification information in response to the determination that the reach determination unit does not enter the reach state. One of a plurality of types of variation pattern including the variation pattern type to be determined is determined. At this time, in response to the fact that the variation pattern type for executing the specific effect is determined, the variation pattern determining means uses the variation pattern of the identification information as a plurality of types prepared in advance for executing the specific effect. Determine one of the non-reach patterns. Thereby, even when the variable display state of the identification information does not become the reach state, it is possible to execute a specific effect so that a variety of effects can be performed, and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, in the same manner as when determining a variation pattern when a specific effect is not executed, it is determined whether or not a specific effect is performed, and each of a case where a specific effect is not performed and a case where a specific effect is performed By determining the variation pattern corresponding to the above, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by executing a specific effect while preventing an increase in the control burden.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pseudo | simulation continuous chance eyes, the development chance eyes, and the chances of surprise. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the payout control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in reach selection production. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for jackpots. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for jackpots. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for small hits. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a reach determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for reach. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for non-reach. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a left-right output determination table. It is a figure which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a reach production | presentation determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a specific production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a promotion effect execution determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation continuous change. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of various control patterns. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data holding area for production control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of the number of times of large winning a prize opening | release opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize ball process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize ball number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize ball control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding memory increase display process. It is a figure which shows the operation example in a pending | holding memory | storage display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a specific production | presentation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a change promotion effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control command processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect process during jackpot control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an ending effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of alerting | reporting control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the lighting operation example of a game effect lamp, the audio | voice output operation example of a speaker, and the display operation example of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the abnormality alerting | reporting screen in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in a modification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern type determination table for jackpots in a modification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for reach in a modification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the loss fluctuation pattern determination table in a modification. It is a figure which shows the structural examples, such as various control boards in a modification. It is a front view which shows the whole structure of the slot machine in a modification.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). A special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed is variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, a decorative design or color design that is a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) that can be identified in a decorative design display area or a color design display area that is a variable display section divided into a plurality of parts such as three. (Also referred to as “4th symbol”) is variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs and color designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In response to the start of either the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol change by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special game, ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas are movable within the display area of the image display device 5 so that the decorative symbols can be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner. May be.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese Numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. For example, it may be a decoration image indicating a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure). In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively.

  During the change of the decorative symbol, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol number, sequentially from the top to the bottom. When the scrolling display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, scroll display is performed from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol number, and the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number is displayed. Subsequently, a decorative symbol having the largest symbol number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, “left” and “right” color symbol display areas 5A and 5B are arranged. When the variation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started as the special symbol game, the variation of the color symbol (for example, update of the display color) is started in the “left” color symbol display area 5A. Is done. On the other hand, when the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started as the special symbol game, the variation of the color symbol is started in the “right” color symbol display area 5B. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the variation of the color symbol is finished, and the fixed color symbol that becomes the variable display result of the color symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The color symbols variably displayed in the “left” and “right” color symbol display areas 5A and 5B include, for example, four types of symbols (for example, “yellow”, “green”, “red”, “blue”, etc.) As long as it is included. Each of the color symbols is assigned a corresponding symbol number. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “4” are assigned to the color symbols “yellow”, “green”, “red”, and “blue”, respectively.

  In addition, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the holding of the variable display is based on the fact that the game ball has entered (starting winning) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B. The start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative design is established, but the variable display game based on the start condition established previously is being executed. This occurs when the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  As an example, the start winning storage display area 5H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Yes. When the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the One of the display parts that are displayed (transparent color) (for example, the leftmost display part among the non-displayed display parts) is changed to blue display. Further, when a special ball game start condition (second start condition) using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established based on the game ball entering the second start winning opening, it is normally not One of the displayed display parts is changed to a red display. Thereafter, when one of the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure and the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, for example, The display at the leftmost display part is removed and the display at each display part is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part whose display color has changed) returns to non-display. Here, in this embodiment, when performing the hold memory display, the number of special figure hold memories based on the establishment of the variable display game start condition can be specified, but the start condition is the first start condition. When it is not possible to specify whether the condition is the second start condition, the display mode of the special figure reserved memory number is changed to a predetermined display mode, for example, by changing the number of display parts corresponding to the special figure reserved memory number to gray. change.

  In the start winning memory display area 5H, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. In addition to the start winning memory display area 5H or in place of the start winning memory display area 5H, a display for displaying the number of special figure reserved memories may be provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the number of special figure hold memories in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold indicator LED 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A so as to be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. It is comprised including.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B includes an electric tulip-type accessory (ordinary electric accessory) having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilt position by a predetermined solenoid for an electric accessory. A second starting prize opening. As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball cannot enter the second start winning opening. It becomes. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the normal electric accessory solenoid is in the on state, so that the game ball can enter the second start winning opening. It becomes. It should be noted that the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is configured such that, even when the normal electric accessory solenoid is off, the game ball can enter the second start winning opening, but the normal electric accessory solenoid is on. You may comprise so that possibility that a game ball may approach may become low rather than a certain time.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, The second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a predetermined large winning opening solenoid, and forms a large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the large winning opening door solenoid is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the large winning opening door solenoid is in the ON state, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening. A game ball that has entered a special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. A plurality of types of normal symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9” or the symbols indicating “−” as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately illuminating decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, one or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. For example, an operation button 30 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate.

  In the normal game with the normal symbol display 20, the normal symbol display 20 shows that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the general chart start condition for executing variable display is established, based on the fact that the general chart start condition for starting variable display of normal symbols, such as the end of the previous general chart game, is established, Be started. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal map”, the opening control is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted, and the predetermined time is reached. When it passes, the closing control is performed to return to the vertical position.

  The special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is caused by the fact that the game ball that has entered the first starting winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is satisfied, the operation is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game, the big hit gaming state, or the small hit gaming state. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a game ball that has entered the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied, the second start condition is started based on the fact that the second special condition game, the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has ended, for example.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, after the predetermined time has elapsed, a fixed special symbol that becomes a variable symbol variable display result is displayed. Stop display (derived display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result, and it becomes “lost” if a special symbol other than the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. Further, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit game state different from the big hit game state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, numbers indicating “1”, “3”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, numbers indicating “5” are jackpot symbols, and “−” is indicated. The symbol is a lost pattern. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lose symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are 15 round jackpot symbols, A special symbol indicating the number “1” is a two-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as the first specific gaming state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. A round is performed that changes to a first state that is advantageous to the user. In this way, the open / close plate that opened the grand prize opening during the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closed the grand prize opening to play the special variable prize ball device 7 as a game. Change to the second state, which is disadvantageous to the person, and finish one round. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round, which is the open cycle of the big prize opening, is the first number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15 round big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as the second specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball device 7 is played in each round. The period for changing to the first state that is advantageous to the player (the period in which the big prize opening is opened by the opening / closing plate) is a second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state. . In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round is a second number (for example, “2”) which is smaller than the first number in the 15 round big hit state. In addition, in the two round big hit state, at least one of the period in which the big winning opening is opened in each round is the second period and the number of executions of the round is the second number is performed. Control other than that may be performed, and other control may be performed in the same manner as in the 15 round big hit state. A game in the round two big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the two-round big hit state, the predetermined winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round is changed from the second state which is disadvantageous to the player to the first state which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to return to the second state after a predetermined period (first period or second period) has elapsed.

  Further, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” which are the 15-round jackpot symbol, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special game 15 After the round big hit state is over, as one of the special game states, the special symbol variation time (special diagram variation time) in the special figure game is controlled to be a short time state as compared with the normal state. Here, the normal state is a specific gaming state such as a big hit gaming state, a special gaming state such as a short-time state, or a gaming state other than the small hit gaming state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a system reset). In the same manner as in the case where the initialization process is executed after the power is turned on, the same control is performed. If the time-short state is terminated when any of the conditions of the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first, Good. In addition, after the 15 round big hit state based on the fact that the special symbol indicating the number “3” out of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, it does not become the short-time state. You may make it be in a normal state. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15 round jackpot symbol controlled to the short-time state or the normal state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is ended. This is usually referred to as a jackpot symbol (also referred to as “non-probable variation jackpot symbol”).

  Out of the special symbols showing the numbers “3” and “7” that will be the 15-round jackpot symbol, the 15-round jackpot is based on the special symbol showing the number “7” being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game. After the state is over, or after the two round jackpot state is over based on the fact that the special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the two-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, As one of the special game states different from the normal game state, for example, the special figure change time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability change state (high probability game state) in which probability change control (probability change control) is continuously performed is controlled. Is done. In this probability change state, the variable display result of each special figure game and the decorative symbol variable display is improved so that the probability that the variable display result becomes “big hit” and is further controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than in the normal state. Such a probability change state may be continued until the next variable display result is a “hit” regardless of the number of executions of the special game. On the other hand, after the certainty change state is reached, any one of the conditions that the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is first. You may make it complete | finish when it is materialized. In addition, even before the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times in the probability variation state or before the variable display result is “big hit”, the probability variation state ends at a predetermined rate when the special figure game is started. There may be. Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15 round jackpot symbol that is controlled to be probable after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is It is called a symbol.

  After the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit game state different from the big hit game state is controlled. In this small hit gaming state, a variable winning operation for changing the special variable winning device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is performed as in the two round big hit state. That is, in the small hit game state, for example, the operation of opening the large winning opening over the second period by the opening / closing plate provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is repeatedly executed until the second number of times is reached. In the small hit gaming state, similarly to the two round big hit state, the period in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second period, and the number of executions of the operation in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second number. It may be controlled so that at least one of them is performed. After the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed, and the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” is continuously controlled. A game in the small hit gaming state in which the number of times that the big winning opening is opened by the variable winning operation is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game, similar to the game in the two round big hit state. When the winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round in the two round big hit state is changed to the first state, the same as the two round big hit state in the small hit gaming state. In the aspect, the winning ball apparatus may be changed to the first state.

  In the probabilistic state or the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and the tilting time of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure” The second start condition is easily established by increasing the possibility that the game ball will enter the second start winning opening, such as control for making the time longer than that in the normal state and control for increasing the number of tilts compared to in the normal state. Thus, control that is advantageous to the player is performed. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. The control to be performed may be different between the probability variation state and the time-short state, or the combination of the controls to be performed (which may or may not include the same control) may be different.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, variable display of decorative symbols is performed in response to variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. That is, in the display area of the image display device 5, each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5 </ b> L is based on the establishment of either the first start condition or the second start condition. At 5C and 5R, variation of the decorative symbols is started, and, for example, the fixed decorative symbols that are variable display results of the decorative symbols in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle” are stopped and displayed (derived display). Note that the procedure for stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative symbols is not limited to the procedure for stopping and displaying the decorative symbols in the predetermined order in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, there may be included one that stops and displays a decorative symbol that becomes a confirmed decorative symbol simultaneously.

  In the period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, The decorative display variable display state may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is changing, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. This is a display state that changes synchronously while constituting all or part of the combination. Corresponding to the reach state, a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or the display mode of the background image is changed. Or change the variation of the decorative pattern. Such a change in the display mode of the character image, the display mode of the background image, and the change in the variation mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect).

  In addition, during the variable display of decorative symbols, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of decorative symbols may become the reach state, and the variable display result may be a “hit” In some cases, a specific effect for informing the player by a variable display mode of a decorative design or the like may be executed. In this embodiment, specific effects such as “sliding”, “pseudo-continuous”, “intro”, “development opportunity”, and “end of development opportunity” are set to be executable.

  In the specific effect of “sliding”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then two or more decorative symbol display areas ( For example, after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc., a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “ 2 ”), the decorative symbols are changed again in the decorative symbol display area (for example, one or both of the“ left ”decorative symbol display area 5L and the“ right ”decorative symbol display area 5R), and then stopped. Thus, an effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped is performed. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, it is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing fluctuation display and changing the decorative symbol immediately after stopping for a short time. It is only necessary to notify that the decorative pattern is not fixed. Alternatively, in the temporary stop display, the decorative design may be re-fluctuated after the decorative design is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the decorative design that has been stopped is confirmed.

  In the specific effect of “pseudo-ream”, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols are displayed based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special game is established once. After the decorative symbols are changed in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then all the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C are displayed. The effect display for changing the decorative design again (pseudo continuous change) at 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times). As an example, in the specific effect of “pseudo ream”, the spurious chance chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. The decorative symbols constituting any of the above are temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, the “left symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed (stopped display or temporary stop display) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the “middle symbol” is displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. The “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. The pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined in advance as a combination of decorative symbols included in the special combination.

  In the specific effect of “Intro”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, A predetermined effect display such as an introduction part of an effect display performed in a reach effect, for example, is performed before the confirmed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (final stop display) at 5C and 5R.

  In the specific development of “Development Opportunity”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right”, and then all the decorative symbols are displayed. After 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the predetermined display effect is started with the variable display state of the decorative symbols as the reach state. The As an example, in the specific effect of “Development chance eyes”, the development chance eyes HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 3B are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The decorative symbols constituting any of the above are temporarily stopped and displayed. Therefore, when any of the development chances HC1 to HC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, or the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. The expectation of the player is raised.

  In the specific production of “end of development opportunity”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then all decorative symbols are displayed. In the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, an effect display is performed in which a combination of decorative symbols predetermined as development opportunities is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). As an example, in the specific effect of “end of development opportunity”, any of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the specific effect of “expansion opportunity” are stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  Furthermore, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the specific effect, for example, by displaying the decorative pattern in a display mode other than the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, such as displaying a predetermined character image or message image. A notice effect may be executed to notify the player that the variable display state may become a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit”. In this embodiment, notice effects such as “character display”, “step-up image”, and “mail display” are set to be executable.

  In the “character display” notice effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then two or more decorative symbols are displayed. Before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the area (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.), a character image prepared in advance in a predetermined position in the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed. An effect display to be displayed is performed.

  In the “step-up image” notice effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then two or more decorative symbols are displayed. Before temporarily displaying decorative symbols in the display area, there may be an effect display in which a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance are switched and displayed in a predetermined order in the display area of the image display device 5. . In the notice effect of “step-up image”, after any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without being switched.

  In the notice display of “mail display”, two or more decorative symbols are displayed after the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the area, in response to the operation button 30 being operated by the player, the effect operation such as changing the effect image display in the display area of the image display device 5 is changed. An effect display is performed.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There is a case where a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination or a fixed decorative symbol that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 in the special combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a confirmed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “3”, which is a normal big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as the 15 round big hit symbol, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the state, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the fixed decorative symbol that becomes the predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, for example, the symbol pattern that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 is used as the confirmed decorative symbol that is normally a big hit combination. Among the decorative symbols “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are an even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”). Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming the normal jackpot symbol, the fixed ornament symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped after the predetermined reach effect is executed or the reach effect is not executed. The variable display mode of the decorative pattern to be displayed is referred to as a “normal” (also referred to as “normal jackpot”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. In this way, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the “normal” variable display mode, the game is controlled to the 15 round big hit gaming state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the short time state or the normal state. become.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the state, after the reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” or after the reach effect is not executed, the predetermined probability variation big hit combination and May be displayed in a stopped manner. Here, for example, the symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the image display device 5 are the fixed decorative symbols that are probable big hit combinations. Among the decorative symbols “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” are “left”, “middle”, What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” is executed, or the reach effect is The variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the fixed decorative symbol of the probability variation jackpot combination is displayed without being executed is referred to as the variable display mode of “first probability variation” when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “first positive change”, the game is controlled to the 15th round big hit state, and when the 15th round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the positive change state. .

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the state, after the reach effect different from the case where the variable display mode is “normal” is executed, the fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined probability variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect different from the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” is executed, The variable display mode of the decorative pattern in which the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is referred to as a “second probability variable” variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “second positive change”, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the positive change state. .

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the state, after the reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” or after the reach effect is not executed, the normal jackpot combination fixed decoration Symbols may be stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the probable big hit symbol, the reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” is executed, or the reach effect. Is not executed, and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern in which the fixed decorative pattern of the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed is referred to as the “third probability change” variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. . Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “third probability change”, the game is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the probability changed state. .

  As described above, when the decorative symbol variable display mode is “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”, the fixed symbol design that is a probability variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed in the variable symbol variable display. , It is determined that the probability change state is reached after being controlled to the 15 round big hit state. On the other hand, when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “third probability variation”, the fixed decoration which is normally a big hit combination in the variable display of the decorative pattern is the same as when the variable display mode is “normal”. The symbol is stopped and displayed. For this reason, when the variable display mode is “third probability variation”, the player cannot recognize whether or not the probability variation state is obtained from the variable symbol display result of the decorative symbols. That is, the confirmed decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination is included in the specific display result that is determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state, and is included in the special display result that is determined to be controlled in the probable state. On the other hand, the confirmed decorative pattern that is normally a big hit combination is included in the specific display result other than the special display result that is not determined to be controlled to the probability variation state.

  When a special symbol indicating the number “1” that is a two-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state does not reach the reach state, and a predetermined non- A fixed decorative symbol that is a reach combination is stopped and displayed, or a fixed decorative symbol that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 3B is stopped or displayed, or FIG. In some cases, the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the random chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. Note that the chances of success TC1 to TC4 may be determined in advance as combinations of decorative symbols included in the special combination. In addition, when the special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state. Then, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, various decorative decorative variable display modes in which various confirmed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Is referred to as a variable display mode of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise accuracy hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “surprise accuracy”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the probability changing state.

  When a special symbol indicating the number “5” as a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the ornament is displayed in the same manner as when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “surprise”. After the variable display of the symbol is performed, the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is stopped or displayed, or the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. There are cases where the display is stopped, or a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach combination is stopped. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a special symbol indicating the number “5” as the small hit symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols on which various confirmed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is as follows. This is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. Here, the confirmed decorative pattern that is one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 3 (C) is stopped and displayed only when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “accurate”, and the variable display mode is “small”. When it is “winning”, it is not stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In other words, when the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display result may be “big hit” due to the variable display mode of “probable”. Determine. After the variable display result is “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state in which the variable winning action similar to the two round big hit state is performed, and when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed. Therefore, the gaming state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” continues. If it is determined that the probability change state or the short-time state is to be ended in response to the variable display game in which the variable display result is “small hit”, the normal state is returned after the end of the small hit gaming state. Will be controlled.

  When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit” is any one of “normal”, “first probability variation”, and “third probability variation”, There is a case where a promotion effect during change as a specific change display is executed. In the fluctuating promotion effect, the decorative symbols that are normally the big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. After that, for example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same decorative symbol is changed again, and the decorative symbol that becomes a probabilistic jackpot combination is changed. Any of the decorative symbols that are normally a big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a finalized decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the changing promotion effect is executed corresponding to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” or “third probability change”, the temporarily changing display is performed as the changing promotion effect. After changing the decorative symbol again, the promotion promotion effect during changing is performed in which the fixed decorative symbol which is normally a big hit combination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the changing promotion effect is executed in response to the variable display mode being “first probability change”, the temporarily stopped display of the decorative design is changed again as the changing promotion effect. After that, the promotion success effect during change is performed to stop and display the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the probability variation big hit combination.

  When the variable display result when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “normal” or “third probability change”, the variable display result is stopped and displayed for 15 rounds. After the control, the jackpot promotion effect is executed as a notification effect as to whether or not to control to the probable change state during the period until the 15 round big hit state is finished. Here, the timing at which the jackpot promotion effect is executed may be a period before the start of the first round in the 15 round big hit state after the variable display result is stopped and displayed, or the 15 round big hit state May be a period during which any one of the rounds is being executed, or may be a period from the end of any round to the start of the next round in the 15 round big hit state, or 15 rounds. A period from the end of the last round in the big hit state to the start of the next variable display game may be used. Alternatively, an effect operation corresponding to the promotion effect during the big hit may be performed during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or decorative design after the end of the 15th round big hit state. The jackpot promotion effect executed after the final round in the 15 round jackpot state is sometimes referred to as “ending promotion effect” in particular.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the gaming state becomes a probable change state even though the confirmed decorative pattern is a normal jackpot combination, and that there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during the jackpot to be notified. As an example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the normal symbol or the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result. At this time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect, while the probable change symbol may be stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect. As another example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect image indicating the roulette game is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the ball thrown into the rotating roulette entered the “even number” in the jackpot promotion failure production and displayed the effect image “Sorry!”, While the jackpot promotion promotion production was thrown into the rotating roulette. The ball enters “odd number” and the effect image “probability!” Is displayed. In response to the special symbol indicating the number “7” being stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special game, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “third probability variation”. By executing the success promotion effect during the big hit before the big hit gaming state is finished, it is notified that there is a promotion that is in a probable change state. Corresponding to the special symbol showing the number “3” being stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special figure game, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the “normal” variable display mode, By the time the gaming state ends, the success promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, and there is no notification that there is a promotion that is in a probable change state.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, the color symbol in the “left” color symbol display area 5 A corresponding to the variable symbol special symbol display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4 A. The variable display is performed, and the variable display of the symbol in the “right” color symbol display area 5B is performed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Is called. Then, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A, the fixed color symbol is stopped and displayed in the “left” color symbol display area 5A. The As an example, when a special symbol indicating a number of “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol, the “left” color symbol display area is displayed. In 5A, the color design indicating “yellow” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed color design. In addition, when any of the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7”, which are the 15-round jackpot symbols, is stopped and displayed as the special symbol for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, “Left In the color symbol display area 5A, the color symbol indicating “red” is stopped and displayed as the determined color symbol. Furthermore, when a special symbol indicating a “-” symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol, it is confirmed in the “left” color symbol display area 5A. A color design indicating “blue” as a color design is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the special symbol indicating the number “5” as the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol, the “left” color symbol display area is displayed. In 5A, the color design indicating “green” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed color design. If any of the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” that will be the 15-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special symbol game using the second special symbol, In the color symbol display area 5B, the color symbol indicating “red” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed color symbol. When a special symbol indicating a “-” symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the second special symbol, the fixed color symbol is displayed in the “right” color symbol display area 5B. As a result, the color design indicating “blue” is stopped and displayed.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a payout control board 15 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 19 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 is mounted with, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and a switch circuit 110 that takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 19, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  The payout control board 15 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11 and receives various control signals transmitted from the main board 11 and controls various payout operations of the game ball by the payout motor 51. The circuit is installed. That is, the payout control board 15 has a function of controlling the award ball payout operation by the payout motor 51. The payout control board 15 is connected to the card unit via a predetermined interface board, and has a function of controlling the ball lending operation by controlling the driving of the payout motor 51 according to the communication result with the card unit. It may be. For example, a payout control microcomputer 150 is mounted on the payout control board 15.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first and second starter switches 22 </ b> A and 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first and second starter switches 22A and 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. If it is. Further, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, and the like.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 19. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to the relay board 19, for example, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 19, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 19 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 19 side to the main board 11 side.

  The relay board 19 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulating circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 19 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 19, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 19 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electrical signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 4A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 4A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4B, a prior determination result indicating whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, and the variable display result is Different EXT corresponding to the big hit type determination result of whether the decorative display variable display mode in the case of “big hit” is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, or “surprise probability” Data is set. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a determination result indicating that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command indicating a determination result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “first probability change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating a determination result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “second probability change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a determination result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “third probability variation” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result notification command indicating a determination result indicating that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “surprise” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C06H is a seventh variable display result notification command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a decorative symbol stop command for designating stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the prior determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the preliminary determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command.

  The command A1XXH is a command for opening a big prize opening for 15 rounds, which designates display of an effect image during a period in which the big prize opening is open in each round, corresponding to the 15 rounds big hit state. Command A2XXH designates display of an effect image (for example, an effect image in an interval between rounds) during a period in which the big prize opening is changed from an open state to a closed state at the end of each round, corresponding to the 15 round big hit state. This is a designation command for the round jackpot after opening the big prize opening. In the special command for opening the big prize opening for 15 rounds and the designation command after opening the big prize opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 15 round big hit state. Is set.

  The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the winning end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to the variable display result notification command or the winning start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the prior determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the prior determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command or the hit start designation command. .

  Command A4XXH corresponds to the two-round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, and the small hit gaming state based on the variable display result being “small hit”. This is a command for specifying the opening of the big prize opening for the accuracy and small hitting that designates the display of the effect image during the period when the big prize opening is in the open state in each round or variable winning action. Command A5XXH specifies the display of the effect image during the period when the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state by the end of each round or variable winning action corresponding to the two round big hit state or the small hit game state. This is a command that is designated after opening the big prize opening for small hits. In the command for opening the big prize opening for the accuracy / small hit and the designation command after opening the big prize opening, for example, the number of executions of the variable winning operation in the round in the big win state or the small hit game state (for example, “1” or “2” )), Different EXT data is set.

  The command B001H is for executing a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. This is a first start port winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition is satisfied. The command B002H is for executing a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting prize opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition is established.

  The command C0XXH is used to display the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in a start winning memory display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5 or the like. This is a pending storage count notification command for notifying the total pending storage count that is the total value of. In response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, for example, either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted as the reserved storage number notification command. Following this, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the reserved memory number notification command, for example, the total number of stored data (for example, “1” to “8”) of the reserved data in the first special figure storage unit 151A and the second special figure storage unit 151B shown in FIG. Alternatively, different EXT data is set corresponding to the total number of start data stored in the start data storage unit 151C (for example, “1” to “8”). Thereby, on the side of the production control board 12, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, and the first special drawing is received. The total number of stored hold data in the hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B can be specified.

  The command D000H is an effect control command (abnormal winning notification 1 designation command) for instructing an abnormal winning notification based on the detection of an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. . The command D001H is an effect control command (abnormal winning notification 2 designation command) for instructing an abnormal winning notification based on the detection of an abnormal winning to the big winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7. Note that the first abnormal winning notification designation command and the second abnormal winning notification designation command may be a common command.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board 15 is a payout control command transmitted / received as an electric signal, for example. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the payout control command used in this embodiment. The payout control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 5 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the payout control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be a plurality of three or more. Good. In the example shown in FIG. 5, a command payout number designation command E0XXH is a command for designating the number of game balls to be paid out (0 to 15 in this embodiment).

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A random access memory (RAM) 102 that provides an area, a central processing unit (CPU) 103 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a random number circuit 104 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103, and I / O (Input / Output port) 105. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  In the main board 11, for example, the random number circuit 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2-1 for determining a jackpot type, and a random value MR2- for determining a reach 2. Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1, MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. 22, for example, to update various numerical data by software, so that the random value MR1, Numerical data indicating a part of MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated independently of the CPU 103 by the random number circuit 104 and indicates the other random number values MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4. The numerical data may be updated by software using the random counter by the CPU 103. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  The random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as a big hit game state, and whether the variable display result is the “small hit” or not. This is a random value used to determine whether or not to control the gaming state, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”, for example.

  When the variable display result is “big hit”, the random display value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, “surprise”, Is a random number value used for determining one of the big hit types as the plurality of types of specific variable display types, for example, taking a value in the range of “1” to “100”. The reach determination random number value MR2-2 is a random number value used to determine whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state when the variable display result is “lost”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “239”.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random number value used for determining the variation pattern type of the decorative design as any one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, a range of “1” to “241”. Takes the value of The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “251” is used. Take.

  FIG. 7 shows variations in decorative symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the cases where the variable display mode of decorative symbols is “non-reach” and “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates a pattern. As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-7 and non-reach PB1- are used as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. 1 and non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1 and non-reach PC1-2 variation patterns are prepared. In addition, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1 to super PA3-8, super PB3-1 to super PB3− are the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”. 5, fluctuation patterns of super PC3-1 to super PC3-4 and super PS3-1 to super PS3-4 are prepared.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation pattern of decorative symbols prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. As shown in FIG. 8, in this embodiment, normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8 and super PA4 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. -1 to super PA4-8, super PA5-1 to super PA5-4, super PB4-1 to super PB4-4, super PB5-1 to super PB5-4, super PC4-1 and super PC4-2, super PD1 -1 and Super PD1-2, Super PE1-1 and Super PE1-2, Super PF1-1 to Super PF1-3, Super PS4-1 to PS4-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-4, Special PG2 1 to Special PG2-3 and Special PG3-1 to Special PG3-3 variation patterns are prepared.

  Among the variation patterns shown in FIG. 7, in the variation patterns of Super PS3-1 to Super PS3-4 and among the variation patterns shown in FIG. In response to the reach state, the reach selection effect is executed during the normal reach effect.

  In the reach selection effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 9, in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol becoming the reach state, the scroll display unit is displayed in the lower right side in the central display area of the image display device 5. The display area is provided with “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display sections. In the scroll display section, the same image as the reach image used in a plurality of types of reach effects (for example, reach effects A to C) is reduced and scroll-displayed, and the decoration reduced in each decorative symbol display section. Variable display of symbols is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, scroll display is performed by rotating a plurality of types of reach images clockwise or counterclockwise. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and scroll display is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of types of reach images may be moved in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction with respect to the display screen of the image display device 5, and the clockwise or counterclockwise direction may be used. A combination of rotation and movement in the vertical or horizontal direction may be performed. When the scroll display is finished and one reach image is confirmed and displayed, the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is enlarged, and execution of the reach effect indicated by this image is started.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a variation pattern for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns of decorative symbols. Table data constituting the table is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 10A and a second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. 10B. . The first special figure display result determination table 130A has a variable display result before a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit” and whether to control the small display game status as “small hit” based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result It is a table referred to for determination. The first special figure display result determination table 130 is a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result depending on whether the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 shown in FIG. 22 is off or on. Are set data (determination data), etc., associated with (assigned to) big hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, and loss determination value data. The second special figure display result determination table 130B shows the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Is a table referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit” based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The second special figure display result determination table 130B decides to assign the random value MR1 for special figure display result determination to the big hit determination value data or the loss determination value data depending on whether the probability variation flag is OFF or ON. Data.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes a jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type determination table 131 sets the decorative symbol variable display mode to “normal”, “based on the random number MR2-1 for jackpot type determination. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” and “surprise probability”. The big hit type determination table 131 indicates whether the value of the variation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 22 is “1” or “2”. Correspondingly, the random number MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is composed of determination data assigned to the big hit types of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, and “surprise probability”. Further, the jackpot type determination table 131 determines the value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 22 (the jackpot type buffer value) based on the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type. It may include table data (setting data) for setting to any one of “00” to “04” corresponding to the big hit type.

  Here, in the setting of the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 11, depending on whether the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”, the big hit type for the big hit type of “surprise” is determined. The assignment of the random value MR2-1 is different. That is, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the value in the range of “83” to “100” of the random value MR2-1 for jackpot type determination is assigned to the jackpot type of “surprise”. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is not assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “surprising” can be varied.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 12 (A) to (F) and FIGS. 13 (A) to (C). The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I indicate that when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I is, for example, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. The selection table is selected according to the determination result of the jackpot type. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I has a variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, or “surprise probability”. The random number value MR3 for determination is set to normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, super CB3-1 to super CB3-5, super CS3-1, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, and special CB4. -1, special CB4-2, special CC4-1, special CC4-2, and the like.

  Here, as an example, focusing on the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the big hit shown in FIG. 12A used when the big hit type is “normal” or “third probability variation”. The variation pattern type determination table 132A for use and the variation pattern type determination table 132B for use of the big hit shown in FIG. 12B used when the big hit type is “first probability change” include normal CA3-1 and super CA3−3. 2. The allocation of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the variation pattern type of the super CS3-1 is different. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is not assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4, whereas in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3 The random pattern MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type -4. Thus, paying attention to the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short-time state, the variation pattern type determination table for big hit that is selected according to the big hit type in the gaming state 132A to 132D (selected in the normal state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132E to 132H (selected in the probability variation state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, 132I (in the short time state) When the selection) is compared with each other, the allocation of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type is different according to the jackpot type, and the variation pattern type is different for the variation pattern type depending on the jackpot type. A random number value MR3 for determination is assigned. As a result, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types according to the determination result as to which of the plurality of types of jackpot types, and it is possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type.

  In particular, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132H, and 132I used when the big hit type is “probability”, for example, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special When the big hit type is other than “surprise” such as CC4-1 or special CC4-2, the random number value for determining the variation pattern type is compared with the variation pattern type to which the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned. MR3 is assigned. As a result, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, when the control is set to the two round big hit state, the variation pattern type is determined to be different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state. can do.

  As another example, focusing on the case where the jackpot type is determined to be “normal”, the jackpot shown in FIG. 12 (A) used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a short-time state. The variation pattern type determination table 132A for use and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E shown in FIG. 12 (E) used when the gaming state is a probabilistic state include the normal CA3-1, super CA3-2, super The allocation of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the variation pattern type of CS3-1 is different. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E, the super CA3. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. Thus, paying attention to the case where the big hit type is determined as one of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, or “surprise probability”, it is selected according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132E (selected when “normal” or “third probability variation”), jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132B and 132F (selected when “first probability variation”), When the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132C and 132G (selected when “second probability variation”) and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132H, and 132I (selected when “surprise probability”) are compared with each other, the pachinko game Variation pattern type determination for each variation pattern type depending on whether the gaming state in the machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state, or a probable variation state Are different random value assignment of MR3 of, also, may be assigned the variation pattern type determination random number value for MR3 for different variation pattern type according to the playing state. This makes it possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state or a probable variation state, and is determined to be the same variation pattern type. The ratio can be varied.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C shown in FIGS. The small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C indicate that when it is determined that the variable display result is “small hit”, a plurality of variation pattern types are determined based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. In each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. 14D, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state Is selected as a use table. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is used for determining that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of the special CA4-1, the special CB4-1, and the special CC4-1. It consists of data.

  Here, the variation pattern type of the special CA4-1 to which the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133A for small hits shown in FIG. 14A is shown in FIG. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. The variation pattern type of the special CB4-1 to which the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133B for small hits shown in FIG. 14B is a big hit shown in FIG. The random pattern MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 132H for use. In the variation pattern type of the special CC4-1 to which the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133C for small hits shown in FIG. 14C, the big hit shown in FIG. Also in the fluctuation pattern type determination table 132I for use, a random value MR3 for determination of the fluctuation pattern type is assigned. As described above, the variation pattern types of the special CA 4-1, the special CB 4-1, and the special CC 4-1 are common variations in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the variable display result is “small hit”. It is a pattern type. That is, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. 12 (D), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132H shown in FIG. 13 (B), and FIG. The big hit variation pattern type determination table 132I shown in C) is set so as to include a variation pattern type that is common to the variation pattern type determined when the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes reach determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIGS. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C indicate whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state when it is determined that the variable display result is “lost”, and the reach determination random number MR2- 2 is a table referred to for determination based on 2. Each reach determination table 134A to 134C is used depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as a table. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C are used to determine the reach determination random number MR2-2 as non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, Determination to be assigned to any one of the determination result indicating that the reach state is not reached such as non-reach HC1-2 and the determination result indicating the reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 Data.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 15A, corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”, among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination, “1” to A value in the range of “204” is assigned to the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, while a value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to the determination result of the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “1”, “1” to “217”, which are larger than the number of random number values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. Is assigned to the determination result of non-reach HA1-2. Furthermore, corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “2”, the number of random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination is larger than the number of random values assigned to non-reach HA1-1 and non-reach HA1-2. A value in the range of “1” to “220” is assigned to the determination result of non-reach HA1-3. The non-reach HA1 among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination corresponding to each of the case where the total number of reserved storage is “3” or “4” or any one of “5” to “8”. A value in the range of “1” to “230”, which is larger than the number of random numbers assigned to each of the determination results of −1 to non-reach HA 1-3, is used as the determination result of non-reach HA 1-4 or non-reach HA 1-5. assign. With this setting, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (eg, “3”), it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio is lower. If the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “reach”, the total When the number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C include a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a use table according to a determination result indicating reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1. The That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as a usage table according to the determination results of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B according to the determination result of the reach HB2-1. Is selected as the usage table, and the variation pattern type determination table for reach 135C is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result of the reach HC2-1. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C has a reach determination result indicating whether the reach is a reach HA2-1 to a reach HA2-3, a reach HB2-1, or a reach HC2-1. Determination of assigning random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to any one of variation pattern types of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2, and super CS2-1 Data.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 16A, “1” to “1” among the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination corresponding to the determination result of the reach HA2-1. A value in the range of “128” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1, while other random values are assigned to the variation pattern types of super CA2-2 and super CA2-3. Corresponding to the determination result of reach HA2-2, a value in the range of “1” to “170” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1 in the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. Further, according to the determination result of reach HA2-3, a value in the range of “1” to “182” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1 among the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. The determination result of the reach HA 2-1 indicates that the reach determination random number MR2-2 corresponds to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0” by the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. Assigned. As the determination result of the reach HA 2-2, the random number value MR2-2 for the reach determination is assigned corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “1” or “2”. The determination result of reach HA2-3 indicates that the total pending storage number is either “3” or “4” or any of “5” to “8”. A random value MR2-2 is assigned. With these settings, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “1”) or more, the fluctuation pattern of the normal CA 2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed is compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The rate determined for the type increases. And the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the “normal” reach production is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the reach production other than “normal”. If so, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure variation time can be shortened as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIGS. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C indicate that when it is determined that the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not the reach state, the variation pattern type is determined based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C are non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2, and the like. It is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as a use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, and the determination results of the non-reach HB1-1 and the non-reach HB1-2. Accordingly, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected as the use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HC1-1 and non-reach HC1-2. The In the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination result indicating that the non-reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1. -1 and non-reach HC1-2, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is determined as non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-. 3. It is comprised from the data for determination etc. which are allocated to one of the variation pattern types of non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D shown in FIGS. 18 and 19A to 19C. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D indicate the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either normal CA3-1 or super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, and the variation pattern type is super CB3. -1 to Super CB3-5 is selected as a use table according to the determination result that determines to be one of the super CB3-5, and the hit variation is determined according to the determination result that the variation pattern type is Super CS3-1. The pattern determination table 137C is selected as a use table, and the variation pattern type is any one of special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CC4-1, and special CC4-2. Depending on the determination result, the hit variation pattern determination table 137D may be used. It is selected as the Bull. Each of the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D includes a random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, and a plurality of variations corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”. It consists of decision data assigned to one of the types of variation patterns. As an example, a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern for executing reach selection effects such as Super PS3-1 to Super PS3-4, corresponding to the variation pattern type of Super CS3-1. It has been.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B shown in FIGS. The loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B indicate the change pattern according to whether or not to reach the reach state and the determination result of the change pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “lost”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each loss variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, in the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3. Accordingly, the loss variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a use table, and the variation pattern type is any of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2, and super CS2-1. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B is selected as a usage table in accordance with the determination result to the effect. The loss variation pattern determination table 138A corresponds to the case where the random display value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is “lost” and the variable display mode is “non-reach” according to the variation pattern type. Data for determination to be assigned to any one of the plurality of types of variation patterns. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the case where the random display value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is “lost” and the variable display mode is “reach” according to the variation pattern type. It consists of data for determination assigned to one of a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  Here, in the setting of the loss fluctuation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. 20, the non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern types such as non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-2. A random pattern MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern that executes a specific effect such as reach PA1-7. Also, corresponding to the variation pattern type of the non-reach CB1-2, a specific effect in which the value in the range of “1” to “100” among the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is “end of development chance eyes” is executed. Assigned to the non-reach PA1-7 fluctuation pattern. With such a setting, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponds to the determination that the decorative symbol variable display result is “losing” and the determination that the decorative symbol variable display state is not the reach state. It is possible to determine that one of the variation patterns of the reach PA1-7 and perform an effect operation as a specific effect.

  For the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4, non-reach HA1- of the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination in the variation pattern type determination table 136A for non-reach shown in FIG. A value in the range of “217” to “241” is assigned corresponding to 1, and a value in the range of “230” to “241” is assigned to correspond to the non-reach HA 1-2. A value in the range of “231” to “241” is assigned corresponding to HA1-3, and a range of “237” to “241” corresponding to each of non-reach HA1-4 and non-reach HA1-5. Value is assigned. Here, for the determination result of non-reach HA1-1, in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 15A, the reach determination disturbance corresponds to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “0”. A value in the range of “1” to “204” is assigned to the numerical value MR2-2. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “1” and “1” to “217” among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. A value in the range is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-3, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “2” and “1” to “220” among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. A value in the range is assigned. For the determination result of non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 134A, the total number of reserved memories corresponds to “3”, “4”, and “1” of the reach determination random number MR2-2. A value in the range of “230” is assigned. For the determination result of non-reach HA 1-5, “1” in the reach determination random number MR <b> 2-2 for the reach determination corresponding to the total reserved storage number “5” to “8” in the reach determination table 134 </ b> A A value in the range of “230” is assigned. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is larger than that when the total number of reserved memories is “0”. Lower. Further, when the total number of reserved memories is “3”, “4” or “5” to “8”, the total number of reserved memories is “0”, or “1” or “2”. Compared with the case of "", the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is low.

  In the example of the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 7, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in which the specific effect is not executed is 5.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2. 3.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-3 is 1.50 seconds. On the other hand, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the “slip” specific effect is executed is 8.25 seconds, and the non-reach PA1 in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of −5 is 16.70 seconds, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-6 in which the specific effect of “Intro” is executed is 10.20 seconds, The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-7 in which the specific effect “end of development opportunity end” is executed is 9.25 seconds. That is, the special figure change time in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is executed corresponding to “non-reach” is longer than the special figure change time in the change pattern in which the specific effect is not executed. When the total number of reserved memories is “1” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 that executes the specific effect is lower than when it is “0”. In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than that when it is less than “3”. Thus, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the setting of the loss variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 21, the variation for executing the “normal” reach effect such as normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4 corresponding to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the pattern. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of super CA2-2, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α1 such as super PA3-1 to super PA3-4 and the reach effect such as super PA3-5 to super PA3-8. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing α2. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is super CA2-3 or super CB2-1, the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is included in the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1 such as super PB3-1 to super PB3-5. Assigned. Further, corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of super CS2-1, a random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned to a variation pattern for executing reach selection effects such as super PS3-1 to super PS3-4. Yes.

  In addition, for example, a variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” such as a variation pattern of super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PB3-4, super PS3-4, The variation pattern type is classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbols has reached the reach state after being performed. That is, since the fluctuation pattern of the super PA 3-4 is a fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect α1, this corresponds to the case of the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the loss fluctuation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. Thus, a random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PA 3-8 is a variation pattern that executes the reach effect α2, the variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the variation variation pattern determination table 138B. The random value MR4 is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PB 3-4 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1, it corresponds to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-3 or the super CB 2-1 in the loss variation pattern determination table 138B. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PS 3-4 is a variation pattern for executing the reach selection effect, the variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type of the super CS 2-1 for variation pattern determination. The random value MR4 is assigned.

  And for the variation pattern types of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, and super CS2-1, in any of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. Also, a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned. Further, the random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135C shown in FIGS. ing. For the variation pattern type of the super CB2-1, a random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B shown in FIG. As described above, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, the effect in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbols has reached the reach state. Table data (determination data) is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified according to the type of operation. In addition, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C, after the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. The table data is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified by type.

  In the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2, game control as shown in FIG. 22, for example, is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A data holding area 150 is provided. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 22 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a start data storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control. A timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A is a special game in which a game ball wins a first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting condition is satisfied but the first starting condition is not satisfied. The hold data of (a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure hold storage unit 151A is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the first start condition by winning in association with the hold number in the order of winning in the first start winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type are set as the pending data, and the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). Remember.

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B receives the game ball at the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start condition is satisfied, but the second start condition is not satisfied. Hold data of a game (a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the winning in association with the holding number in the winning order to the second starting winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type are set as the pending data, and the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). Remember.

  The start data storage unit 151C stores start data indicating which game ball has won in either the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, so that the winning order of each game ball can be specified. As an example, the start data storage unit 151C stores “first” start data corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening or “second” start data corresponding to winning in the second starting winning opening. The game balls are stored in association with the hold numbers according to the winning order of each game ball.

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, in the game control flag setting unit 152, a special figure process flag, a normal figure process flag, a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, a first prize ball payout prohibition flag, a second prize ball payout A prohibition flag or the like is provided.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. In the step S15 of FIG. 45 executed for control and the special symbol process shown in FIG. 47, it is instructed which process should be selected and executed. The ordinary symbol process flag indicates which process in the ordinary symbol process shown in FIG. 45 or the ordinary symbol process shown in FIG. 54 executed for controlling the progress of the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20. Indicates whether to select and execute.

  The big hit flag is set to an on state corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, it is cleared and turned off in response to, for example, that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. The small hit flag is set to an on state corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “small hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, it is cleared and turned off in response to, for example, the small hit symbol being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. The probability change flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the probability change state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the end of the probability change state. . The time reduction flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the time reduction state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the completion of the time reduction state. .

  The first winning ball payout prohibition flag is set to an on state in response to the gaming ball being detected a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) by the second starting port switch 22B when the second starting winning port is closed. Is done. The second prize ball payout prohibition flag is set to an on state in response to the game ball being detected by the count switch 23 when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than the big hit gaming state.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, a time for controlling the progress of the big hit game state or the small hit game state on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. It is used as a down counter that counts down automatically. Alternatively, the game control process timer is used as an up-counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time point, such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state start point, and periodically counts up. May be.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a special figure variation time which is the execution time of the special figure game. As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The normal map change timer is for measuring the time for controlling the progress of the normal game, such as the normal map change time, which is the execution time of the normal game, on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 includes a random counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, a total reserved memory number counter, a round number counter, a winning cumulative number counter, and a total number of winning balls A counter or the like is provided.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 counts a part of numerical data indicating a random number value used for controlling the progress of the game, separately from the random number circuit 104, so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software. belongs to. For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4 is stored as a random count value. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total reserved memory number is stored in the total reserved memory number counter as a total reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the total reserved memory number )

  The round number counter is for counting the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round is completed and the next round is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated. The round number counter may also count the number of executions of the variable winning operation in the small hit gaming state.

  The winning cumulative number counter is for counting the number of game balls (cumulative winning number) detected by the second starting port switch 22B when the second starting winning port is closed. For example, in the winning cumulative number counter, count value data corresponding to the number of game balls detected by the second starting port switch 22B when the second starting winning port is in a closed state is stored as a cumulative winning number count value. In response to the detection by the second start port switch 22B, the winning cumulative number count value is incremented by one and updated.

  The total prize ball number counter is for counting the number of game balls to be prize balls. The total prize ball number counter is added and updated corresponding to the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23. In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by any one of the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the value of the total prize ball number counter is incremented by 3, and the count switch 23 When a game ball is detected by the above, the value of the total prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. When a game ball that has entered a winning opening (general winning opening) different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening is detected, the value of the total winning ball number counter is incremented by 10. The

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a variable special figure designation buffer, a jackpot type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality of buffer areas (for example, “12”), and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 101 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, the value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) is “1” in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Set to Further, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0” in response to the completion of the special figure game.

  In the jackpot type buffer, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit” is a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, and “surprise probability”. The buffer value corresponding to the determination result of which to be determined is stored. As an example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 11, when the jackpot type is “normal”, the value of the jackpot type buffer (the jackpot type buffer value) is set to “00”, and the jackpot type When the type is “first probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “01”, and when the big hit type is “second probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “02” and the big hit type is In the case of “third probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “03”, and in the case of the big hit type “surprise”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “04”.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes a program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed. The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal to the sound control board 13, and a lamp control board 14. On the other hand, wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal is connected. Furthermore, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal from the operation button 30 is also connected to the effect control board 12.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 12, random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, temporary stop symbols for promotion effect determination Random number value SR2, random number value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding / development chance, random number values SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols, for determining the promotion effect execution Random number SR5, random numbers SR6-1 to SR6-3 for determining the first to third specific effect patterns, random values SR7 for determining the sub-notice pattern type, and random numbers for determining the first to third sub-notice patterns Numerical data indicating each of SR8-1 to SR8-3 and the random value SR9 for determining the reach effect are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 124 includes these random number values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR5, SR6-1 to SR6-3, SR7, SR8-1 to SR8-3, SR9. Any numerical value data may be used as long as it counts numerical data indicating all or part of the above. The effect control CPU 120 uses various random counters different from the random number circuit 124 such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of numerical values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR5, SR6-1 to SR6-3, SR7, SR8-1 to SR8-3, SR9 You may make it count. Further, when the random number circuit 124 is not mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 uses the random counter to select random values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-. 3, numerical data indicating all of SR5, SR6-1 to SR6-3, SR7, SR8-1 to SR8-3, SR9 may be counted.

  The random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “left” and “middle” in the display area of the image display device 5 as fixed decorative symbols that are variable display results of decorative symbols. , A random number value used to determine a decorative symbol (final stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the final stop symbol here is finally stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the decorative symbol variable display ends. These are the three decorative designs. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “96”.

  The random value SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the promotion effect is temporarily stopped at the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for "left", "middle", and "right" when executing the promotion effect during change. It is a random value used to determine the decorative pattern of the normal jackpot combination to be displayed, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”. The random value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding / development chance is “left”, “middle”, This is a random value used to determine the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in all or part of the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Values in the range of “1” to “101” are used. Take.

  The random numbers SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, and “right” when executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. This is a random value used to determine a combination of temporary stop symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. As an example, the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-1 takes a value in the range of “1” to “211”, and the second pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-2. Takes a value in the range of “1” to “229”, and the random value SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “311”.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability change” to “third probability change”, the random effect value SR5 for promotion effect execution determination Or a random number value used for determining whether or not to execute the promotion effect during the big hit, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random values SR6-1 to SR6-3 for determining the first to third specific effect patterns are specified corresponding to the contents of the effect operation when executing the specific effects such as “slip”, “pseudo-continuous”, and “intro”. It is a random value used to determine the production pattern as one of a plurality of types. As an example, the random value SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern in the case of executing the “slip” specific effect, and is in the range of “1” to “71”. Takes a value. The random value SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern in the case of executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, and a value in the range of “1” to “150” is used. Take. The random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is used to determine a specific effect pattern in the case of executing the specific effect of “Intro”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. .

  The random value SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is used to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect, and to determine any one of a plurality of kinds of prepared notice pattern types when the notice effect is executed. It is a random value and takes a value in the range of “1” to “191”. The random numbers SR8-1 to SR8-3 for determining the first to third notice patterns are random values used to determine any one of a plurality of kinds of prepared notice patterns. As an example, the random value SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect of “character display”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “499”. The random value SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect of the “step-up image”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “1009”. The random value SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect of “mail display”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “200”.

  The reach effect determination random number value S9 is a random value used for determining the type of reach effect performed after the reach selection effect is executed, and ranges from “1” to “200”. Takes a value.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the production control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, a final stop shown in FIGS. 24A to 24D is used as a table for determining a predetermined decorative pattern that is one of the predetermined non-reach combinations and the development chances HC1 to HC8. Symbol determination tables 160A to 160D are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 24A is a final left symbol that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L among the predetermined decorative symbols that are a predetermined non-reach combination. It is a table referred in order to determine the stop symbol FZ1-1 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160A includes determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It is composed of The final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 24 (B) is a final right symbol that becomes a finalized symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R among the finalized symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the stop symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 or the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160B stores the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It consists of data for determination assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of decorative symbols to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 24C is a final final symbol that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C among the predetermined decorative symbols that are the predetermined non-reach combinations. This table is referred to for determining the stop symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3, and the like. .

  Here, the determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes a left / right outcome determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 25. From the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, It is determined whether the left / right output type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. The final stop symbol determination table 160C has a third random number SR1- 3 is made up of data for determination and the like assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of decorative symbols that become the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 24 (B), the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. Is not assigned the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. With such an assignment, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol combination is a reach combination or a jackpot combination (except for the odd chance TC1 to TC4). It can be avoided. Also, in the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 24C, combinations of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are predetermined decorative symbols. The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the part that becomes the combination of. For example, even if it is other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the part that becomes the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 3A, the part that becomes the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is set in the portion that becomes the odd chance TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 3 (C), and further in the portion that becomes a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. Not assigned. With such an assignment, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous chance item GC1 to GC8, an expansion chance item HC1 to HC8, or a random chance symbol TC1. ˜TC4, and even certain non-reach combinations similar to these chances.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 24 (D) shows the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C when the specific effect of “end of development chance” is executed. 5R, the final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6, which are final decorative symbols, are determined based on the random numbers SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbols. It is a table that is referred to to determine either. The final stop symbol determination table 160D is composed of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the development chance items HC1 to HC8.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B shown in FIGS. 27A and 27B, as tables for determining a confirmed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination. The final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 27A is a left final stop symbol FZ2 that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L among the finalized decorative symbols that are reach-losing combinations. -1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is a table that is referenced to determine. The final stop symbol determination table 162A is a decorative symbol (left and right final stop symbol FZ2) in which the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. −1, FZ2-2), the data for determination assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 27B is a medium final stop symbol FZ2 that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C among the finalized decorative symbols that are the reach-losing combination. -3 is a table that is referred to to determine -3 based on the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol.

  Here, the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 constituting the reach-losing combination is specified by a symbol difference that is a difference value between the symbol numbers of the decorative symbols that are the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. The That is, in the variable display of decorative symbols, the variation of decorative symbols is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and “left” → “right” → “ When the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, such as “medium”, “left” and “right” other than the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed last. The left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, and then the final stop symbol determination table 162B is The difference (design difference) between the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined at this time, a final decorative symbol that is the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C is determined. The final stop symbol determination table 162B is a variation pattern of normal PA2-1, normal PA2-2, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, or one of normal PA2-3 and normal PA2-4. Variation pattern of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-4, Super PB3-1 to PB3-5, Super PC3-1 to Super PC3-4, Super PS3-1 to Super PS3-4, Special PG2-3 , The random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is changed to a symbol difference “−2” depending on the variation pattern of the super PA 3-5 to the super PA 3-8. , “−1”, “+1”, “+2”, and the like.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, a final stop symbol determination table shown in FIGS. 28A to 28C is used as a table for determining a definite decorative symbol to be one of the big hit combinations and the chances of success TC1 to TC4. 163A to 163C are included. The final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 28 (A) is stopped in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as the confirmed decorative symbols that are usually the big hit combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that are displayed based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163A, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the symbol number “of the normal symbol that is the same as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3. It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 28 (B) stops in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as the confirmed decorative symbols that are probable big hit combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that are displayed based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163B, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3, and the symbol number “ It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”. The final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 28C includes left, middle, and right final stop symbols FZ4-1 and FZ4 in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. -2 and FZ4-3 are tables that are referred to in order to determine the combination of the determined decorative symbols as one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. is there. The final stop symbol determination table 163C is made up of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the odd chance items TC1 to TC4.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, reach effect determination shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B is performed as a table for determining one of a plurality of types of reach effects performed after execution of the reach selection effect. Tables 172A and 172B for use are included. In the big hit reach effect determination table 172A shown in FIG. 29A, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit types are “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). When the reach selection effect is executed, the type of reach effect performed after the reach selection effect is executed is set to one of reach effect A to reach effect C based on the value of the random value SR9 for determining the reach effect. It is a table that is referenced to determine. The jackpot reach effect determination table 172A includes determination data that assigns a random effect SR9 for determining the reach effect to reach effects A to C. The reach reach determination table 172B for reach shown in FIG. 29B is used for determining the reach effect when the variable display result is “lost”, the variable display mode is “reach”, and the reach selection effect is executed. This table is referred to in order to determine one of reach effects A to reach effect C as the type of reach effect performed after execution of the reach selection effect based on the random number SR9. The reach effect determination table 172B for reach includes the determination data for assigning the reach effect determination random number SR9 to the reach effect A to reach effect C, and the like. Here, in the jackpot reach effect determination table 172A, only a value in the range of “1” to “30” of the random effect SR9 for determining the reach effect is assigned to the reach effect A, while the reach effect determination for the reach is determined. In the table 172B, a value in the range of “1” to “100” is assigned to the reach effect A. On the other hand, in the jackpot reach effect determining table 172A, the reach effect determining random number SR9 is assigned a value in the range of “101” to “200” to the reach effect C, while the reach reach In the effect determination table 172B, the reach effect C is assigned only in the range of “171” to “200”. That is, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the ratio of performing reach effect A after execution of reach selection effect is lower than that when variable display result is “lost”, while reach effect C is performed. The percentage of For this reason, compared with the case where the reach effect A is performed after the reach selection effect is performed, the reliability (the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit”) is higher when the reach effect C is performed.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, specific effect pattern determination tables 164A to 164C shown in FIGS. 30A to 30C as tables for determining one of a plurality of types of specific effect patterns. Yes. When the specific effect of “slip” is executed, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 30A slides the specific effect pattern based on the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to slip TP1-4. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A includes non-reach PA1-4, normal PA2-2, normal PA2-4, normal PA2-6, normal PA2-8, super PA3-2, super PA3-6, super PS3-2, super PA4-2, Super PA5-2, Super PB3-2, Super PB4-2, Super PB5-2, Super PC3-2, Super PC3-4, Super PD1-2, Super PE1-2, Super PF1-3, Super According to a variation pattern (see FIGS. 7 and 8) in which a specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as a variation pattern of PS4-2, special PG1-2, special PG2-2, and special PG3-3. The random value SR6-1 for determining the specific effect pattern is assigned to the specific effect patterns of the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4. And the like have been constructed from Teru decision for the data.

  Here, in the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1, after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, By temporarily stopping the decorative symbols in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and then rapidly changing the decorative symbols in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, In the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, an effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2, after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, “left” and “right” After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the decorative symbol display area 5L of the “left” is re-fluctuated at high speed and then stopped and displayed. In the decorative symbol display area 5L, an effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3, after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, “left” and “right” The decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and then the decorative symbols are redisplayed in the decorative pattern display area 5R. In the decorative symbol display area 5R, the effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4, after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, “left” and “right” The decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and then the decorative symbol display area 5L of the “left” is redisplayed at a low speed and then stopped to display “left”. In the decorative symbol display area 5L, an effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. 30B simulates the specific effect pattern based on the second specific effect pattern determination random value SR6-2 when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of the series TP2-1 to the pseudo series TP2-3. The specific effect pattern determination table 164B includes non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PB3-4, super PS3-4, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PB4-4, super Depending on the variation pattern (see FIGS. 7 and 8) in which a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, such as the variation patterns of PB5-4, Super PF1-1, Super PS4-4, and Special PG1-3. (2) Random value SR6-2 for determining a specific effect pattern is composed of data for determination assigned to the specific effect patterns of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3.

  Here, in the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then changed again. The total re-variation display operation to be performed (pseudo-variation) is performed once until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. In the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-2, the all-revariable display operation is performed twice before the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-3, the all-revariable display operation is performed three times before the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the specific performance pattern is determined to be one of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3 by using the specific performance pattern determination table 164B, thereby determining the number of executions of the pseudo-series variation. be able to.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 30C indicates the specific effect pattern based on the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern when the “intro” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to intro TP3-3. The specific effect pattern determination table 164C includes non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3, super PB4-3, super In response to a variation pattern (see FIGS. 7 and 8) in which a specific effect of “intro” is executed, such as a variation pattern of PB5-3, the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is converted into intro TP3. -1 to intro TP3-3 are made up of determination data to be assigned to specific production patterns.

  Here, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, for example, whether the previous effect buffer value provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 164 shown in FIG. 44 is “1” to “3”. Accordingly, the assignment of the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern to the specific effect patterns of the intro TP3-1 to the intro TP3-3 corresponding to a plurality of types of effect operations is different. The previous effect buffer value is set to “1” when the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “Intro” is determined to be intro TP3-1, and is set to “2” when it is determined as intro TP3-2. When it is determined to be intro TP3-3, it is set to “3”. When the previous effect buffer value is “1”, the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is not assigned to the intro TP3-1, and the previous effect buffer value is “2”. In some cases, the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is not assigned to the intro TP3-2, and when the previous effect buffer value is "3", 3 The random value SR6-3 for determining the specific effect pattern is not assigned. When the specific effect of “intro” is executed according to the variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-6 by such assignment, the specific effect same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “intro” executed last time It can be prevented from becoming a pattern.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes a fluctuating promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 31A and a jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 31B. In the changing promotion execution execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 31A, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). Is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the changing promotion effect based on the promotion effect execution determination random number SR5. In the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A, the random number SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is changing depending on whether the jackpot type is “normal” or “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. It consists of decision data assigned to the determination result indicating the presence or absence of the promotion effect. Here, when the jackpot type is “normal” or “third probability variation”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result of the promotion effect during the change, and the promotion promotion during the change is failed The production will be executed. When the jackpot type is “first probability change”, a part of the random effect value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned to the determination result with the changing promotion effect, and the rest is determined without the changing promotion effect. Assigned to the result. In this case, if the determination result indicates that there is a changing promotion effect, the changing promotion success effect is executed. Further, when the big hit type is “second probability variation”, the random value SR5 for promotion effect execution determination is all assigned to the determination result of no change promotion effect during change, and the promotion success effect during change and promotion during change Any failure production will not be executed.

  In the big hit middle promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 31 (B), the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). In this case, the table is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect based on the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution. The jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B determines whether the jackpot type is “normal”, “first probability change” to “third probability change”, and determines the random value SR5 for promotion effect execution determination as a jackpot. It is composed of data for determination assigned to a determination result indicating the presence or absence of a promotion promotion effect or a jackpot promotion failure effect. Here, when the jackpot type is “normal”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result of the jackpot promotion promotion effect, and the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed. It will be. When the jackpot type is “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result of no jackpot promotion effect, and the jackpot promotion Both the successful performance and the jackpot promotion failure production will not be executed. Further, when the jackpot type is “third probability variation”, a part of the random effect value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned to the determination result of the jackpot promotion promotion success effect, and the rest has the jackpot promotion promotion failure effect. Is assigned to the judgment result. In this case, depending on the determination result, either the jackpot promotion promotion success effect or the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, temporary stop symbols shown in FIGS. 32 (A) to 32 (D) are used as tables for determining decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped when a specific effect of “slip” is executed. Decision tables 166A to 166D are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are used according to whether the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as. That is, when the specific performance pattern is the slip TP1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is selected as the usage table, and when the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-2, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is selected as the usage table. In the case of the slip TP1-3, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is selected as the use table, and in the case of the slip TP1-4, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is selected as the use table. Each temporary stop symbol determination table 166A to 166D has a temporary slip / development opportunity temporary change according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols in the decorative symbol display area for changing the decorative symbols again. The random number value SR3 for determining the stop symbol is composed of determination data assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that are temporary stop symbols. That is, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is a decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in accordance with the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1. In response to the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the slip / development chance temporary stop symbol is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “1” of the decorative symbols to be the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1. Data for determination to be assigned to "8". The temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is a symbol of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2. In accordance with the numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2. Contains decision data to be assigned to. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166C has a decorative symbol pattern that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3. In accordance with the numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-3. Contains decision data to be assigned to. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is a symbol of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in accordance with the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4. In accordance with the numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4 Contains decision data to be assigned to.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, temporary tables shown in FIGS. 33 (A) to 33 (D) are used as tables for determining decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed. Stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D indicate that when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PA4- 4. Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1, Super PS3-4, Super PS4-4, Special PG1-3 It is selected as a use table in accordance with the remaining number of all-revariable display operations that are executed until the definite decorative symbol that is the stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, for example, the remaining number of re-variation display operations is “0” in the variation of the decorative symbol (pseudo continuous variation) in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Becomes “1” when the decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state (pseudo continuous variation), and becomes “2” when the decorative symbol is temporarily displayed twice before (“pseudo continuous variation”). By the time the pseudo continuous variation in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and executed is executed, the variation of the decorative symbol in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed (pseudo continuous variation) is “3”. This corresponds to how many times the pseudo continuous fluctuation (the fluctuation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed.

  As an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shows the total re-variation display operation executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being non-reach PA1-5. When the remaining number of times is “1”, the temporary temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the temporary symbol in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. Right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 as a right symbol to be stopped and selected as a use table for determining a middle temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 as a middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C Is done. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B has a variation pattern of Super PA3-4, Super PA3-8, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1. , The rest of the all-revariable display operation executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to being one of Super PS3-4, Super PS4-4, or Special PG1-3 When the number of times is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the temporary stop in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol to be displayed, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ2-3, which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed, in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C are determined. It is selected as the usage table for.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C has a variation pattern of Super PA 3-4, Super PA 3-8, Super PA 4-4, Super PA 4-8, Super PB 3-4, Super PB 4-4, Super PB 5-4, Super PF1. -1, all-variable display operation executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to being one of Super PS3-4, Super PS4-4, or Special PG1-3 When the remaining number of times is “2”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R The right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2, which is the right symbol for temporary stop display, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ3-3, which is the middle symbol for temporary stop display in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, are displayed. It is selected as the usage table to a constant. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D has a variation pattern of Super PA3-4, Super PA3-8, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1. , The remaining number of all re-variable display operations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to being one of Super PS3-4 or Super PS4-4 is “3”. The left temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R; The right temporary stop symbol KZ4-2, the middle temporary stop symbol KZ4-3 used as a middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. It is selected as Le. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-5, the specific effect pattern is determined as the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 based on the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. Since the total re-variation display operation to be re-variable after the stop display is performed only once, there is no need to select the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D as the use table. When the variation pattern is the special PG1-3, the specific effect pattern is determined as the pseudo continuous TP2-1 or the pseudo continuous TP2-2 based on the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. Since the number of executions of the total re-variation display operation for re-variation after displaying the symbol temporarily stopped is performed at most twice, it is not necessary to select the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D as the use table.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 33A and the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in FIG. 33B are respectively a left final stop symbol as a final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. The random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is set to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, KZ2 according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of 3 is determined data assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 configured by the combination of -3. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 33C is determined by using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol 2-3. The random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol is set to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3-2 depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is selected. , KZ3-3, and the like are determined data to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. 33 (D) includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, a right temporary stop symbol 3-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C. The random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is assigned to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is selected. , KZ4-3, and the like are determined data to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8.

  By determining the temporary stop symbols using such temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D, for example, as shown in FIG. 34, the pseudo continuous sequences based on the specific effect patterns of the pseudo continuous units TP2-1 to TP2-3. In accordance with the number of executions of the variation, the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for each variation are displayed in the pseudo consecutive chance eye GC1. ~ GC8 can be determined.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, a temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 35 is used as a table for determining a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when a specific effect of “Development Chance” is executed. include. The temporary stop symbol determination table 168 has a chance of slipping / development according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols which become the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. The random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for time is composed of determination data assigned to the development chance items HC1 to HC8 constituted by the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3. ing.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, a temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 36 as a table for determining a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed when the changing promotion effect is executed. . The temporary stop symbol determination table 169 has the same left center right that is stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as the final symbol combination that is a big hit combination In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3, It consists of decision data assigned to the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” of the normal symbols that are the same as the stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes a notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. The advance notice pattern type determination table 170 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of advance notice pattern types based on the random number SR7 for determining the advance notice pattern type. In the notice pattern type determination table 170, when the variation pattern is any one of non-reach PA1-1, non-reach PA1-2, non-reach PB1-1, non-reach PC1-1, or non-reach PA1-3. , Non-reach PA1-4, non-reach PA1-6, non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-2, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5 -3, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Super PS3-3, Super PS4-3, notice that depending on the fluctuation pattern other than these fluctuation patterns A decision is made to assign the random number SR7 for pattern type determination to the notice pattern types of no notice or notice CY1 to CY3. And the like have been constructed from use data.

  Here, in the notice pattern type determination table 170, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3, Corresponding to the variation pattern (see FIG. 7 and FIG. 8) in which a specific effect of “Intro” is executed, such as Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Super PS3-3, Super PS4-3, All random number values SR7 for determining the notice pattern type are assigned without notice. Therefore, when the specific effect of “intro” is executed, execution of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect is limited. Here, in the specific effect of “Intro”, the variation of the decorative symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then within a short time. When the effect display in the specific effect is started and the notice effect is performed, the execution period overlaps. Therefore, in the notice pattern type determination table 170, when a variation pattern in which a specific effect of “intro” is executed, a random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is assigned so that there is no notice at all times, thereby “intro” The notice effect in which the specific effect of "" and the execution period overlap can be prevented from being executed.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, notification pattern determination tables 171A to 171C shown in FIGS. 38 to 40 as tables for determining any of the plurality of types of notification patterns. When the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY1, the notice pattern determination table 171A indicates that there is no notice or the notice pattern is given as notice YP1-1 to notice YP1 based on the random number SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern. -4 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of them. The notice pattern determination table 171A determines the random number value SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern according to the variation pattern, without any notice, or for determining data assigned to the notice patterns of the notices YP1-1 to YP1-4. It is composed of

  Here, in the notice patterns of notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4, the effect display in the notice effect of “character display” is performed in different effect display modes. In the “character display” notice effect, a character image corresponding to each notice pattern of notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

  When the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY2, the notice pattern determination table 171B indicates that there is no notice or the notice pattern is given as notice YP2-1 to notice YP2 based on the random number SR8-2 for second notice pattern determination. -4 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of them. The notice pattern determination table 171B determines the random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern according to the variation pattern without decision, or data for decision assigned to the notice patterns of the notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4, etc. It is composed of

  Here, in the notice patterns of the notice YP2-1 to the notice YP2-4, the effect display in the notice effect of the “step-up image” is performed in different effect display modes. In the notice effect of “step-up image”, any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and then each notice pattern of notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4 is displayed. Correspondingly, a plurality of types of effect images may be switched and displayed according to a predetermined order, or the effect images may not be switched.

  When the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY3, the notice pattern determination table 171C indicates that there is no notice or the notice pattern is given as notice YP3-1 to notice YP3 based on the third notice pattern random number SR8-3. -3 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of them. The notice pattern determination table 171C determines the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern according to the variation pattern, without any notice, or for determining data assigned to the notice patterns of the notice YP3-1 to the notice YP3-3, etc. It is composed of

  Here, in the notice patterns of the notice YP3-1 to the notice YP3-3, the effect display in the notice effect of “mail display” is performed in different effect display modes. In the “mail display” notice effect, an effect image that prompts the user to operate the operation button 30 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and then the notice YP 3-1 to the notice is issued in response to the operation button 30 being operated. While displaying the effect image corresponding to each notice pattern of YP3-3, if the operation button 30 is not operated, the effect image corresponding to each notice pattern is not displayed. As described above, in the “mail display” notice effect, the effect operation changes in response to the operation button 30 being operated.

  In the notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 40, a random value SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern corresponding to the variation patterns of non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5, PA1-7 in which the specific effect is executed. Of these, values in the range of “1” to “170” are assigned without notice. On the other hand, the random number SR8-3 having a smaller number than the variation patterns of non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5, PA1-7 corresponding to the variation pattern in which the variable display state of the decorative symbol is the reach state is not notified. Assigned to. For example, values in the range of “1” to “160” are assigned without notice corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4. In the other variation patterns that reach the reach state, the random display value SR8− for determining the third notice pattern depends on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” and the type of reach (normal or super). The assignment of 3 is different. On the other hand, non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5 corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PB1-1, and non-reach PC1-1 where the specific effect is not executed. A larger number of random values SR8-3 than the variation pattern of PA1-7 are assigned without notice. In other words, values in the range of “1” to “190” are assigned without notice. With such a setting, the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed, compared to the variation pattern in which the decorative display variable display state is the reach state. The ratio of executing the effect is reduced, and the ratio of executing the notice effect is higher than that when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the specific effect is not executed. In addition, when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the specific effect is executed, the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the variation pattern does not execute the specific effect. Higher reliability (the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit”) is higher, while the proportion of the decorative display variable display mode is a reachable variation pattern. The ratio of executing a high-priority notice effect is low.

  The control pattern table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, a symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 41, a notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 42A, various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. It is included. In the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 41, the ornament symbol in the display area of the image display device 5 in the period from when the variation of the ornament symbol is started until the final symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Multiple types of data are stored as design variation control patterns, such as variable display operations, effect display operations in reach selection effects, effect display operations in reach effects, and effect display operations in specific effects. It only has to be. Each symbol variation control pattern includes, for example, a presentation control process timer set value, a display control pattern including a display control process timer determination value and display control data, a voice control process timer determination value and voice control data. Control for controlling various performance operations according to variable display of decorative symbols, such as configured voice control pattern, lamp control pattern including lamp control process timer judgment value and lamp control data, and end code It is comprised from data, and the content of various effect control, the switching timing of effect control, etc. should just be set in time series.

  As an example, the symbol variation pattern table 180 includes non-reach CPA 1-1, non-reach CPA 1-4, non-reach CPA 1-1, non-reach CPA 1-4, The non-reach CPA 1-5 symbol variation control pattern is stored. Corresponding to the variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-6, symbol variation control patterns of non-reach CPA 1-6-1 to non-reach CPA 1-6-3 are stored. Here, the symbol variation control pattern of the non-reach CPA 1-1 stops and displays the fixed decorative symbol that is the non-reach combination without displaying the effect image in the specific effect. In the non-reach PA1-4 design change control pattern, after the effect image in the specific effect of “slip” is displayed, the fixed decorative design that becomes the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. In the non-reach PA1-5 design variation control pattern, after displaying the effect image in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the definite decorative design that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. The symbol variation control patterns of non-reach CPA 1-6-1 to non-reach CPA 1-6-3 are non-reach combinations after displaying effect images in main notice effect TP3-1 to main notice effect TP3-3, respectively. Stop and display the confirmed decorative pattern. The symbol variation pattern table 180 stores symbol variation control patterns of normal CPA2-1 and super CPA3-1 corresponding to the variation patterns of normal PA2-1 and super PA3-1, respectively. The design variation control pattern of the normal CPA 2-1 stops and displays the confirmed decorative design that is the reach-losing combination without displaying the effect image in the specific effect, the effect image in the reach selection effect, and the effect image in the reach effect. The design variation control pattern of the super CPA 3-1 does not display the effect image in the specific effect and the effect image in the reach selection effect, but displays the effect image in the reach effect, and then stops and displays the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the reach lose combination. . Furthermore, the symbol variation pattern table 180 stores the symbol variation control patterns of the super CPA 4-1-1 and the super CPA 4-1-2 in correspondence with the variation pattern of the super PA4-1. The pattern change control pattern of the super CPA 4-1-1 does not display the effect image in the specific effect, the effect image in the reach selection effect, and the effect image in the reach effect, and after displaying the effect image in the changing promotion effect. Then, the definite decorative symbol that is a big hit combination is stopped and displayed. The design variation control pattern of the super CPA 4-1-2 is a jackpot combination without displaying the effect image in the specific effect, the effect image in the reach selection effect, the effect image in the reach effect, and the effect image in the changing promotion effect. The display of the fixed decorative pattern is stopped. As another example, the symbol variation control pattern table 180 stores the symbol variation control patterns of the super CPS 6-1 corresponding to the variable display patterns of the super PS 3-1 and the super PS 4-1, and the super PS 3-3 and Corresponding to the variable display pattern of the super PS 4-3, symbol variation control patterns of the super CPS 6-3-1 to super CPS 6-3-3 are stored. Here, the symbol variation control pattern of the super CPS 6-1 displays the effect image of the reach selection effect before the operation of the operation button 30 is detected without displaying the effect image of the specific effect. The symbol variation control patterns of the super CPS 6-3-1 to super CPS 6-3-3 are detected by the operation of the operation button 30 after displaying the effect images in the main notice effect TP3-1 to the main notice effect TP3-3, respectively. The effect image of the reach selection effect before being performed is displayed.

  Also, the symbol variation control pattern table 180 includes super CPS 6-5-1 to super CPS 6-5 corresponding to the variable display patterns of super PS3-1 to super PS3-4 and super PS4-1 to super PS4-4. -3 symbol variation control patterns are stored. Here, the symbol variation control pattern of the super CPS 6-5-1 displays the reach image of the reach selection effect after the operation of the operation button 30 is detected, and then confirms and displays the reach image indicating the reach effect A. . The symbol variation control pattern of the super CPS 6-5-2 displays the reach image of the reach selection effect after the operation of the operation button 30 is detected, and then confirms and displays the reach image indicating the reach effect B. The symbol variation control pattern of the super CPS 6-5-3 displays the reach image of the reach selection effect after the operation of the operation button 30 is detected, and then confirms and displays the reach image indicating the reach effect C.

  In addition, the symbol variation control pattern table 180 stores the symbol variation control patterns of super CPS 6-6-1 to super CPS 6-6-3 corresponding to the variable display patterns of super PS3-1 to super PS3-4. Has been. Here, in the symbol variation control pattern of the super CPS 6-6-1, after the effect image in the reach effect A is displayed, the confirmed decorative symbol that is the reach-losing combination is stopped and displayed. The symbol variation control pattern of the super CPS6-6-2 displays the effect image in the reach effect B, and then stops and displays the confirmed decorative symbol that is the reach-losing combination. In the symbol variation control pattern of the super CPS 6-6-3, after the effect image in the reach effect C is displayed, the fixed decorative symbol that is the reach-losing combination is stopped and displayed.

  Further, the symbol variation control pattern table 180 includes super CPS 6-7-1-1 to super CPS 6-7-3-1 and super CPS 6-6-1 corresponding to the variable display patterns of super PS4-1 to super PS4-4. The symbol variation control patterns of 7-1-2 to Super CPS 6-7-3-2 are stored. Here, the symbol variation control pattern of the super CPS 6-7-1-1 displays the effect image of the reach effect A, then displays the effect image of the promotion effect during the change, and stops the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the jackpot combination Display. In the symbol variation control pattern of the super CPS 6-7-2-1, after displaying the effect image in the reach effect B, the effect image of the changing promotion effect is displayed, and the confirmed decorative symbol that is the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. In the symbol variation control pattern of the super CPS 6-7-3-1, after displaying the effect image in the reach effect C, the effect image of the changing promotion effect is displayed, and the confirmed decorative symbol that is the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. In the symbol variation control pattern of Super CPS 6-7-1, after displaying the effect image of reach effect A, without displaying the effect image of the promotion effect during variation, the definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Let The symbol variation control pattern of Super CPS 6-7-2-2 displays the effect image of reach effect B, and then displays the definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination without displaying the effect image of the promotion effect during variation. Let The symbol variation control pattern of the super CPS 6-7-3-2 displays the effect image in the reach effect C, and then stops the display of the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the jackpot combination without displaying the effect image of the promotion effect during the change. Let

  The sub-notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 42 (A) shows the control content of the effect operation corresponding to the notice effect, such as the effect display operation in the notice effect, corresponding to each of the plurality of types of the notice pattern. A plurality of types of data may be stored as the notice effect control pattern. Each notice effect control pattern includes, for example, a display control pattern including a display control process timer determination value and display control data, a sound control pattern including a sound control process timer determination value and sound control data, Consists of control data for controlling various presentation operations according to variable display of decorative symbols, such as lamp control patterns and end codes that include lamp control process timer judgment values and lamp control data, and are time-series Therefore, it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like.

  As an example, the sub-notice effect control pattern table 181 stores the notice effect control patterns of the notices CYP1-1 to CYP1-4 corresponding to the notice patterns of the notices YP1-1 to YP1-4. Yes. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-1 displays the character image MC101 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-1. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-2 displays the character image MC101 and the character image MC102 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-3 displays the character image MC101 and the character image MC103 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-3. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-4 displays the character images MC101 to MC103 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-4.

  The notice effect control pattern table 181 stores notice effect control patterns of notice CYP2-1 to notice CYP2-4 corresponding to each of the notice patterns of notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-1 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-1, and ends the notice effect without switching the effect image. . The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-2 displays the effect image of the second step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-2, and ends the notice effect without switching the effect image. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-3 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-3, and after switching the effect image to the effect image of the second step, the notice effect Exit. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-4 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-4, switches the effect image to the effect image of the second step, and further the third step. After switching to the effect image, the notice effect is ended.

  In addition, the notice effect control pattern table 181 stores the notice effect control patterns of the notice CYP3-1-1 and the notice CYP3-1-2 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1. The notice effect control patterns of the notice CYP3-2-1 and the notice CYP3-2-2 are stored corresponding to the notice pattern, and the notice CYP3-3-1 and the notice CYP3-3 are corresponded to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3. -2 notice effect control pattern is stored. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-1-1 displays the effect image before the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-1-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 displays the effect image before the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-3-1 displays the effect image before the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-3-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3.

  In the various effect control pattern table 182 shown in FIG. 42B, a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls in the period controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state are stored as the effect control pattern. It only has to be done. Each production control pattern includes, for example, a production control process timer set value, a display control pattern configured to include a display control process timer determination value and display control data, and a sound control process timer determination value and audio control data. Various effects according to the progress of the performance operation in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, such as a sound control pattern to be played, a lamp control pattern including a lamp control process timer judgment value and lamp control data, and an end code The content of control, the switching timing of production control, etc. should just be set in time series.

  FIG. 42C shows a configuration example of each effect control pattern shown in FIGS. 41, 42A and 42B. As shown in FIG. 42C, the effect control pattern includes, for example, an effect control process timer set value, a display control pattern, a sound control pattern, and pattern data constituting a lamp control pattern. In addition, a display control pattern, a sound control pattern, and a lamp control pattern are included in all effect control patterns in principle. Here, the effect control process timer set value is an effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 provided in the effect control microcomputer 120 when the control of the effect operation corresponding to each effect control pattern is started. Timer initial value to be set.

  The display control pattern is a control pattern of an operation for displaying various effect images on the display screen of the image display device 5. For example, as shown in FIG. 43 (A), display control process timer determination values TA-01, TA- .. And display control data DA-01, DA-02,... When the effect control process timer value, which is the value of the effect control process timer, matches any of the display control process timer determination values TA-01, TA-02,..., The display control data associated with the timer determination value. Any one of DA-01, DA-02,... Is read and, for example, various processes indicated in the read control data, such as sending a display control command to the VDP provided in the display control unit 123, Settings are made.

  The voice control pattern is a control pattern for outputting the production voice from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, as shown in FIG. It includes control data such as voice control data DB-01, DB-02,. When the production control process timer value matches any of the sound control process timer determination values TB-01, TB-02,..., The sound control data DB-01, DB-02, Are read out, and various processes and settings indicated in the read control data are performed, for example, transmitting voice data to the voice IC mounted on the lamp control board 13.

  The lamp control pattern is a control pattern for turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the game effect lamp 9, and as shown in FIG. 43 (C), for example, lamp control process timer judgment values TC-01, TC-02,. , Lamp control data DC-01, DC-02,... When the production control process timer value matches any of the lamp control process timer determination values TC-01, TC-02,..., The lamp control data DC-01, DC-02, Are read out, and various processes and settings indicated in the read control data are performed, for example, the lamp data is transmitted to the lamp driver circuit mounted on the lamp control board 14. .

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 44, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. ing. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 44 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state in the display area of the image display device 5, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers that are used to control the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various kinds of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the timing of switching effect images to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Control. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes an input port for taking in various signals such as an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30, and effect control. And an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the substrate 12. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a sound effect signal transmitted to the audio control board 13, an electric decoration signal transmitted to the lamp control board 14, etc. Is output.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is generated from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the previous power supply stop. When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 45 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to detect input from each switch 21, 22A, 22B, 23, etc. via the switch circuit 110. The state of the signal is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a main random number value update process for updating at least a part of the random number values MR1, MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, MR4 and the like used on the main board 11 side by software is executed. (Step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation in the display device 4B and setting of the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade. After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. When the command control process is finished, the game control timer interrupt process is finished after the interrupt is permitted.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S12 of FIG. 45 as error processing. In this error process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not it is a predetermined notification prohibition period (step S171). Here, the notification prohibition period is, for example, predetermined as a period in which notification of abnormal winning is prohibited when initial notification corresponding to the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. That's fine. If it is a notification prohibition period in step S171 (step S171; Yes), the error processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not the notification prohibition period in Step S171 (Step S171; No), it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is “4” or more (Step S171). S172). Here, when the value of the special figure process flag is “4” or more, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed in the special symbol process in step S15 shown in FIG. The That is, when the value of the special figure process flag is “4” or more, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a big hit state or a small hit gaming state.

  In step S172, if the value of the special figure process flag is less than “4” and the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has not been reached (step S172; No), in other than the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state It is determined whether or not the detection signal from the count switch 23 that detects the game ball that has entered the special winning opening maintained in the closed state is turned on (step S173).

  At this time, if the detection signal from the count switch 23 is on in step S173 (step S173; Yes), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in response to the game ball being detected by the count switch 23, Settings for transmitting the second abnormal winning notification designating command are performed (step S174). For example, in the process of step S174, the storage address (first address) of the second abnormal prize notification designation command table stored in advance in the ROM 101 is designated by the transmission command pointer in the effect control command buffer included in the transmission command buffer. Set the specified buffer area. The second abnormal winning notification designating command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. Is done.

  When the process of step S174 is executed, after setting for invalidating the payout of the winning ball corresponding to the game ball detected by the count switch 23 in step S173 (step S175), the error process is terminated. . For example, in the process of step S175, it is prohibited to set control data for transmitting a payout number designation command in the payout control command buffer included in the transmission command buffer. More specifically, in the prize ball processing executed in step S18 shown in FIG. 45 by setting the second prize ball payout prohibition flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the on state, etc., It is only necessary to prevent transmission setting of the payout number designation command corresponding to the detection of the game ball that has entered the winning opening. In this way, the payout of prize balls as prizes for game balls for which an abnormality has been determined based on detection by the count switch 23 is limited.

  On the other hand, when the value of the special figure process flag is “4” or more in step S172 and the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is set (step S172; Yes), the detection signal from the count switch 23 is detected. If is in the off state (step S173; No), it is determined whether or not the value of the normal process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is “4” (step S176). Here, when the value of the normal chart process flag is “4”, it corresponds to the fact that the variable display result in the normal game is “per normal figure” in the normal symbol process of step S16 shown in FIG. Thus, the normal electric accessory operation is performed in which the movable wing piece included in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is moved from the vertical position to the tilting position to change the second starting winning opening from the closed state to the open state. Processing is executed.

  In step S176, when the value of the ordinary process flag is a value other than “4” (step S176; No), the second start winning opening maintained in the closed state other than the normal electric accessory operation processing is displayed. It is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B that detects the game ball that has entered is in an ON state (step S177). At this time, if the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in the OFF state (step S177; No), the error processing is terminated in response to the determination that no abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, if the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is on in step S177 (step S177; Yes), the value of the winning cumulative number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is set to 1. In addition to the addition (step S178), it is determined whether or not the value of the winning cumulative number counter after the addition has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, “5”) (step S179). If the value of the cumulative winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit (step S179; Yes), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and settings for transmitting the first abnormal winning notification designation command are performed (step S180). . For example, in the process of step S180, the storage address (first address) of the first abnormal prize notification designation command table stored in advance in the ROM 101 is designated by the transmission command pointer in the effect control command buffer included in the transmission command buffer. Set the specified buffer area. The first abnormal winning notification designating command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. Is done.

  When the process of step S180 is executed, after setting for invalidating the payout of the prize ball corresponding to the game ball detected by the second start port switch 22B in step S177 (step S181), error processing is performed. Exit. For example, in the process of step S181, it is prohibited to set control data for transmitting a payout number designation command to the payout control command buffer included in the transmission command buffer. More specifically, in the award ball processing executed in step S18 shown in FIG. The transmission setting of the payout number designation command corresponding to the detection of the game ball that has entered the 2 start winning opening may be prevented. In this way, the payout of prize balls as prizes for game balls for which an abnormality has been determined based on detection by the second start port switch 22B is limited.

  On the other hand, if the value of the winning cumulative number counter does not reach the predetermined upper limit value in step S179 (step S179; No), the error processing is terminated.

  Through the processing of steps S173 to S175 and steps S177 to S181, in the determination period other than the big hit gaming state, the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and in the determination period other than the open state of the second start winning opening. In response to at least one of the game balls being detected a predetermined number of times by the second start port switch 22B, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and if an abnormality has occurred, the first abnormal winning notification designation command or By performing transmission setting of the second abnormal winning notification designation command, it is possible to notify the side of the effect control board 12 that it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  Also, the process of step S171 prohibits the start of abnormality notification when the effect control CPU 120 is performing initial notification. The production control microcomputer 100 continues to execute the initialization notification until the period corresponding to the prohibition period has elapsed since the start of the abnormality notification.

  Note that in the process of step S172, the CPU 103 determines whether or not an abnormal winning to the big winning opening has occurred based on the value of the special symbol process flag. Therefore, since it can be determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data, the determination process can be simplified. Further, as described above, since the big hit end process or the small hit end process is executed for a predetermined time after the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is closed, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 has been won in the big winning opening immediately before closing. The game ball is prevented from being detected by the count switch 23 after the value of the special symbol process flag has returned to “0”, and an error is reported even though it is a regular prize. There is no.

  Further, in the process of step S176, the CPU 103 determines whether or not an abnormal winning in the second start winning opening has occurred based on the value of the usual process process flag. Therefore, since it can be determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data, the determination process can be simplified. Furthermore, since the CPU 103 determines that an abnormal winning has occurred when the value of the cumulative winning number counter reaches a predetermined upper limit value in the process of step S178, the value of the normal process flag is “4”. When a game ball is won at the second start winning port immediately before switching from “0” to “0”, and the value of the usual process flag returns to “0”, and the second start port switch 22B detects it, It is possible to prevent an error from being notified. Further, instead of providing the cumulative winning number counter, the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is closed a predetermined time before the value of the ordinary process flag is changed from “4” to “0”, and the value of the ordinary process flag is “4”. The abnormal winning determination may be performed at the time of switching from “0” to “0”, and the timing for determining the abnormal winning may be delayed from the timing for closing the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. In this way, the game ball that has won the second start winning port immediately before the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is closed is changed by the second start port switch 22B after the value of the usual process flag returns to “0”. It is prevented from being detected, and no error is reported even though it is a regular winning.

  At the same time that the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B is closed, the value of the ordinary process flag is switched from “4” to “0”, and a predetermined time has elapsed since the value of the ordinary process flag is switched from “4” to “0”. An abnormal winning determination may be made later. Also, in the determination of the abnormal winning to the big winning opening, the timing for determining the abnormal winning by the same method may be delayed from the timing for closing the big winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 7).

  In the processing of steps S173 and S177, when it is determined that the detection signals from the count switch 23 and the second start port switch 22B are continuously on for a predetermined number of times (for example, two times) timer interruption, It may be determined that the count switch 23 and the second start port switch 22B are turned on. As a result, for example, when the detection signals from the count switch 23 and the second start port switch 22B are turned on only for a short time due to the influence of noise or the like, it is possible to prevent erroneous determination that an abnormality has occurred. . The winning cumulative number counter may be cleared when the ordinary figure display result is “per ordinary figure”, or when there is no abnormal winning at the second starting prize opening for a predetermined period. It may be cleared.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 45 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S100). FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the start winning determination process.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 48, the CPU 103 first corresponds to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A among the first start opening switch 22A and the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A provided in the ON state is on (step S201). At this time, if the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step S201; Yes), the first hold storage corresponding to the number of hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. It is determined whether or not the number is a predetermined upper limit value (eg, “4”) (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 may identify the first reserved memory number by reading the value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (first reserved memory number count value).

  If the first reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the first reserved memory number is incremented by 1, for example, by adding 1 to the first reserved memory number count value ( Step S203). Then, from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are extracted (step) S204). Numerical value data indicating each random number value extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, whereby each random number value is stored (step S205). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address (first address) of the first start opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, etc., to transmit the first starting opening winning designation command to the effect control board 12. Is set (step S206). The first start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 45 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After executing the processing of step S206, for example, by adding 1 to the value of the total reserved memory number counter (total reserved memory number count value) provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, the total reserved memory number is set to 1. Add (step S207). Then, “first” start data corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening is stored at the head of the empty entry in the start data storage unit 151C (step S208). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the reserved memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the reserved memory number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S209). . The reserved memory number notification command set in this way follows the first start winning prize designation command, for example, by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 45 after the special symbol process process ends. The signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  If the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the OFF state in step S201 (step S201; No), or if the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes) ) Or, after the process of step S209 is executed, the detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the ON state. Is determined (step S210). At this time, if the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in an OFF state (step S210; No), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in the on state (step S210; Yes), it corresponds to the number of the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not the second reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S211). At this time, the CPU 103 may specify the second reserved memory number by reading the value of the second reserved memory number counter (second reserved memory number count value) provided in the game control counter setting unit 154.

  If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value in step S211 (step S211; Yes), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the second reserved memory number is not the upper limit value (step S211; No), the second reserved memory number is incremented by 1, for example, by adding 1 to the second reserved memory number count value. (Step S212). Then, from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are extracted (step) S213). Numerical value data indicating each random number value extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, whereby each random number value is stored (step S214). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the second start opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning designation command to the effect control board 12 is performed. (Step S215). The second start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 45 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After the process of step S215 is executed, the total reserved memory number is incremented by 1 (step S216), for example, by adding 1 to the total reserved memory number count value. Then, “second” start data corresponding to winning in the second start winning opening is stored at the head of the empty entry in the start data storage unit 151C (step S217). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S218). . The reserved memory count notification command set in this way follows the second start winning prize designation command, for example, by executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 45 after the special symbol process is completed. The signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. After executing the start winning determination process as described above, one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 shown in FIG. 47 is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag. Note that the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first prize ball payout prohibition flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on before executing the process of step S210. By skipping the processes of steps S210 to S218, the special symbol variation display based on the abnormal winning may not be performed.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special diagram reservation storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display device 4B. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether the variable display result of the special symbol, the decorative symbol, the color symbol, etc. is set to “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. A determination is made whether or not. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process is based on the determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, the determination result of whether or not the variable display state of the decorative design is the reach state, etc. Thus, a process of determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types, a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type, and the like are included.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process includes a process for performing setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Further, it is also determined whether or not the elapsed time thus measured has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the special figure variation time is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed. A process for setting is included. Then, a determination is made as to whether one of the big hit flag and the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on. If the big hit flag is on, the special process flag is set. The value is updated to “4”, and when the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big winning opening is a process for starting the execution of the round in the big winning gaming state and setting the opening for the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” Etc. are included. At this time, for example, an upper limit of a period during which the big prize opening is in an open state may be set corresponding to the setting of the maximum number of big prize opening times. As an example, when the maximum value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening is set to “15” corresponding to the 15 round big hit state, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”. On the other hand, if the maximum value for the number of times a big winning opening is opened is set to “2” corresponding to the two round big hit state, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”. Set to.

  The special winning opening releasing process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This process during opening of the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the elapsed time measured, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. Processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. And when returning a special winning opening to a closed state, the process etc. which stop supply of the drive signal with respect to a predetermined solenoid should just be performed.

  The post-opening processing for the special winning opening in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The post-opening process for the big prize opening includes a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big prize opening is in an open state has reached the maximum number of open big prize openings, This includes a process for making a setting for transmitting an end designation command when hit.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. This jackpot end process corresponds to a period in which an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state by the effect electric parts such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. For example, a process for waiting until the waiting time has elapsed and a process for performing various settings corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits is a setting for starting the execution of variable winning action in the small hit game state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, etc. The processing to perform is included. At this time, for example, the maximum value of the number of times that the big prize opening is opened is “0” because the variable display result is “small hit”, and the upper limit of the period during which the big prize opening is opened is set to “0. “5 seconds” may be set.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the drive signal to a predetermined solenoid may be executed.

  The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In the small hit end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an effect operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is performed by the electric parts for effects such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and the game effect lamp 9. Processing that waits until the time has passed is included. Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 49, the CPU 103 first sums the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number based on the total reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. It is determined whether or not the total pending storage number as a value is “0” (step S231). At this time, if the total reserved storage number is other than “0” (step S231; No), the start data is read from the start data storage unit 151C (step S232). At this time, the start data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the start data storage unit 151C may be read.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the total reserved memory number count value, the total reserved memory number is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and the start data storage unit 151C receives the hold number “1”. The storage contents of the start data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “8”) are shifted up by one entry (step S233). Then, it is determined whether the start data read in step S232 is “first” or “second” (step S234).

  When it is determined in step S234 that the start data is “first” (step S234; first), the first special figure hold storage unit 151A stores the hold data in association with the hold number “1”. As the hold data, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type are respectively read (step S235). At this time, for example, the first reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the first reserved memory number is updated to be decremented by 1, and the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A uses the reserved number “1”. The storage contents of the hold data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted up by one entry (step S236). Then, in response to starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the value of the special fluctuation designation buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (the fluctuation special figure) The designated buffer value) is set to “1” (step S237).

  After executing the processing of step S237, the first special feature shown in FIG. The figure display result determination table 130A is selected and set (step S238). For example, in the process of step S238, the storage address (first address) of the first special figure display result determination table 130A in the ROM 101 may be set in a determination table pointer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The CPU 103 refers to the first special figure display result determination table 130A set in this way, whereby the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for special figure display result determination read in step S235 is the big hit determination value data. (Step S239).

  If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the jackpot determination value data in step S239 (step S239; No), the numerical value indicating the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination read in step S235. It is determined whether or not the data matches the small hit determination value data (step S240). At this time, if it matches with the small hit determination value data (step S240; Yes), the small hit flag is set to the on state (step S241).

  If it is determined in step S234 that the start data is “second” (step S234; second), the second special figure hold storage unit 151B stores the hold data in association with the hold number “1”. As the hold data, the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S242). At this time, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved memory number count value, the second reserved memory number is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B uses the reserved number “1”. The storage contents of the hold data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted up by one entry (step S243). Then, in response to starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” (step S244).

  After the process of step S244 is executed, a second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10B is used as a use table for determining whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit”. 130B is selected and set (step S245). For example, in the process of step S245, the storage address of the second special figure display result determination table 130B in the ROM 101 may be set in a determination table pointer or the like. The CPU 103 refers to the second special figure display result determination table 130B set in this manner, whereby the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for special figure display result determination read in step S242 is the big hit determination value data. Is determined (step S246).

  When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the jackpot determination value data in step S239 or step S246 (step S239; Yes, or step S246; Yes), the jackpot provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 The flag is set to an on state (step S247). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 11 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S248). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2-1 read in step S235 or step S242, the jackpot type is determined by referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in step S248. It is determined as one of a plurality of types of “normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, “third probability variation”, and “outward probability” (step S249). When the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S244, the big hit type determination random number MR2-1 for the big hit type of “surprise” in the big hit type determination table 131. Is not assigned, the jackpot type will not be determined as “surprising”. In addition, as will be described later, in the probable change state or the short time state, the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening, so that the variable special figure designation buffer value is easily set to “2” in the process of step S244. In the process of step S249, the big hit type is less likely to be determined as “surprising”. That is, in the probability variation state or the short time state, the big hit type is not easily determined as “surprising accuracy”. Corresponding to the big hit type determined in step S249, the big hit type buffer value is set to any one of “00” to “04” (step S250).

  After executing one of the processes of step S241 and step S250, the maximum winning opening opening number is set (step S251). At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 50, if the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the maximum value of the number of times of winning the prize winning opening corresponds to the game that is opened 15 times. Set to “15”. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprise” or the small hit type is “small hit”, the maximum value of the number of big winning opening is set to “2” corresponding to the two-time open game. To do.

  When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the small hit determination value data at step S240 (step S240; No), or when the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the big hit determination value data at step S246 ( Step S246; No) Or, after executing the process of step S251, a fixed special symbol is set corresponding to the result of determining the variable display result and determining the jackpot type (step S252). As an example, if the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the small hit determination value data in step S240, or if the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the big hit determination value data in step S246, it is variable. Corresponding to the determination result that the display result is “lost”, the special symbol indicating the “−” symbol that becomes the lost symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the small hit determination value data in step S240, the small hit symbol is obtained corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “5” is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, when the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the big hit determination value data in step S239 or step S246, “1”, “3”, which become the big hit symbols, according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S249. ”Or“ 7 ”, one of the special symbols indicating the number is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “normal”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that is the normal jackpot symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is any one of “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability variation big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “surprise”, the special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the two round big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S252, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S253), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . If the total number of reserved memories is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step S254), and the special symbol normal process is terminated.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 51, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the table selection shown in FIG. 13D is performed based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time-short state According to the setting, any one of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I is selected and set as a use table for determining any one of a plurality of variation pattern types (step S262). Here, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified from the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the gaming control flag setting unit 152.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S263). At this time, if the small hit flag is ON (step S263; Yes), the table shown in FIG. According to the selection setting, any one of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types (step S264).

  When the small hit flag is OFF in step S263 (step S263; No), based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, FIG. In accordance with the table selection setting shown in FIG. 4, any one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected and set as a use table for determining whether or not the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state (step S265). At this time, for example, the total reserved memory number is specified by reading the total reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S266). Subsequently, a random value MR2-2 for reach determination is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S267). Then, based on the reach determination random value MR2-2 extracted in step S267, the presence or absence of the reach state is determined by referring to one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C set in step S265 (step S265). S268).

  If a determination result indicating that there is a reach state is obtained in step S268 (step S269; Yes). In order to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the determination result of the reach state such as the determination results of reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 in step S268. As the use table, one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected and set (step S270). On the other hand, when a determination result indicating that there is no reach state is obtained in step S268 (step S269; No), non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5 and non-reach HB1- in step S268. As a use table for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the determination result of no reach state such as the determination result of 1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2 Then, any one of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C is selected and set (step S271).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264, S270, and S271, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S272). ). Then, based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S272, by referring to the use table set in any of steps S262, S264, S270, and S271, a plurality of variation pattern types can be selected. Either one is determined (step S273).

  Here, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A using the first special symbol on the basis that the first starting condition is satisfied. Whether to determine the type, or to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied Regardless of this, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types by using numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 used for determination of the variation pattern type updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, the numerical value data indicating the common random number MR3 used for determining the variation pattern type is used to change by the common processing module regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S268. The pattern type can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S273, the variation pattern type may be determined with reference to the determination table stored in the address of the ROM 101 set in the determination table pointer.

  After the variation pattern type is determined in step S273, hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D are used as use tables for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type. And one of a plurality of types of variation pattern determination tables such as loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B are selected and set (step S274). Subsequently, a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S275). Then, based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern extracted in step S275, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S274 (step S276). .

  Here, in the processes of steps S275 and S276, the decorative symbol variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A using the first special symbol when the first start condition is satisfied. Whether or not the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied Instead, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random value MR4 used for determining the variation pattern updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing in steps S275 and S276, the variation pattern is detected by the common processing module using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S268. Can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S276, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 101 set in the determination table pointer.

  Following the determination of the variation pattern in step S276, a special figure variation time corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern is set (step S277). Thereafter, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the above (step S278). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  After the process of step S278 is executed, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the change of the special symbol are performed (step S279). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sequentially issues a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to transmit, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is designated by a transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 Stored in the designated buffer area. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sequentially issues a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to transmit, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. When the setting in step S279 is performed, every time the command control processing in step S17 shown in FIG. The first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, and the variable display result notification command are sequentially transmitted.

  Following the setting in step S279, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S280), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 52, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S291). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S291; Yes), the big hit start production waiting time is set (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the jackpot start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S292, setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Should be stored in. Thereafter, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S294). In addition, a setting for ending the probability variation state and the time reduction state is performed (step S295). For example, in step S295, a process for clearing the probability variation flag and the time-shortage flag to turn it off, a process for clearing a special-figure variation number counter for counting the number of times the special figure game is executed in the probability variation state and the time-shortage state, etc. It only has to be executed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S296), and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S291 (step S291; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S297). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S297; No), a small hit start time production waiting time is set (step S298). For example, in the process of step S298, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the small hitting start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer.

  Subsequent to the process of step S298, as in the process of step S293, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S299). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S300). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S301).

  If the small hit flag is off in step S297 (step S297; No), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S302). . After executing one of the processes in steps S301 and S302, it is determined whether or not to end the probability variation state or the time reduction state (step S303). For example, in the process of step S303, the value of the special figure fluctuation number counter (special figure fluctuation number count value) is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 or adding 1, and the updated special figure fluctuation number count value is a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not the special game state end determination value is met. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the probability variation state or the time reduction state may be terminated by clearing the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag, etc., and controlled to the normal state. On the other hand, if it does not coincide with the special game state end determination value, the state of the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag may be maintained and the process of step S303 may be ended. After executing the end determination of the probability variation state or the short time state, the special symbol stop process ends. Note that the end determination based on the special figure variation count value may be performed only in the short-time state, and the probability variation state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. . Alternatively, for example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the probability change state end from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 and referring to a probability change state end determination table stored in advance in the ROM 101 or the like. Further, it may be determined whether or not to end the probability variation state.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot ending process shown in FIG. 53, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot ending presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the post-opening process for the big prize opening in step S116 shown in FIG. 47, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and depending on whether or not the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value. What is necessary is just to determine whether the production waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S311 (step S311; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end stage waiting time has elapsed in step S311 (step S311; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S312). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type buffer value read in step S312 is “00” corresponding to the “normal” jackpot type (step S313). At this time, if the big hit type buffer value is “00” (step S313; Yes), the setting for starting the control to the short time state is performed (step S314). As an example, in the process of step S314, the time reduction flag is set to the on state, and the count initial value (for example, “100”) determined in advance corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time reduction state. May be set in the special figure fluctuation counter.

  When the big hit type buffer value is other than “00” in step S313 (step S313; No), setting for starting control to the probability variation state is performed (step S315). As an example, in the process of step S315, the probability variation flag is set to the on state, and a predetermined count initial value corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the probability variation state is the number of times of the special diagram variation. What is necessary is just to set to a counter.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S314 and S315, the special figure process flag value is updated to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S316), and then the big hit end process is terminated. To do.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process executed in step S16 of FIG. In this normal symbol process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 provided in the passage gate 41 is in an on state, so that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. It is determined whether or not (step S131). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is turned on (step S131; Yes), the process at the time of passing the gate is executed (step S132). On the other hand, when the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is in the OFF state (step S131; No), the process of step S132 is skipped.

  As an example of the process at the time of passing through the gate executed in step S132, the following process is executed. That is, first, whether or not the number of pending map storages, which is the number of pending data stored in the pending map storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”). Determine whether or not. At this time, if the number of stored customary drawings is an upper limit value, the current game ball detection is invalidated and the process at the time of passing the gate is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the number of stored customary drawings is less than the upper limit value, for example, the CPU 103 indicates a numerical value indicating a random number value for determining a normal display result from numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter. Extract data. Then, the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value is set as the hold data at the head of the empty entry in the usual hold storage unit. After the above-described processing at the time of passing the gate, or after it is determined in step S131 that the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is in the OFF state, the following processing is performed according to the value of the usual process flag. Each process of steps S140 to S144 is executed.

  The normal symbol normal process in step S140 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In this normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display device 20 starts the normal symbol game based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the normal symbol storage unit. At this time, for example, if there is pending data stored in the usual figure hold storage unit, the value of the usual figure process flag is updated to “1”.

  The normal symbol determination process in step S141 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol determination process, based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the normal symbol display result, the normal symbol display result as a variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in the general symbol game is set to “per normal symbol” or “ A determination is made as to whether or not it is “usually lost”. At this time, for example, when one of the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag is on, the determination is set so that the ratio of determining “per standard” is higher than when both are off. You may refer to the table. As a result, in the probability variation state and the short time state, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary game is more likely to be “per ordinary figure” than in the normal state, so that the second start winning prize formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is formed. The mouth is likely to be in an open state, and the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening. Further, in the normal symbol determination process, the universal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the universal symbol display result is also determined. At this time, for example, when either the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is on, the normal variation pattern may be determined such that the normal variation time is shorter than when both are off. This reduces the interval for deriving and displaying the normal symbol variable display result in the normal game in the probability variation state and the short time state. The second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is likely to be in an open state, so that the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning opening.

  The normal symbol variation process in step S142 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol variation process, a setting for varying the normal symbol is performed in the general symbol game by the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol that changes based on these settings is displayed as a normal symbol display result that is a variable symbol display result of the normal symbol when the normal symbol stop process in step S143 is executed. In the normal symbol variation process, the elapsed time from the start of variation of the normal symbol is measured. At this time, a determination is made as to whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the normal time fluctuation time determined in accordance with the normal time fluctuation pattern. Then, when the usual figure change time is reached, the value of the usual figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The normal symbol stop process in step S143 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “3”. In this normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol display 20 is set to stop and display the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol. Note that the setting for stopping and displaying the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is the value of the normal symbol process flag when the measured elapsed time reaches the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol variation process of step S142. It may be performed before updating to “3”. Further, in the normal symbol stop process, when the normal symbol display result is “per normal symbol”, for example, for driving the solenoid for the ordinary electric accessory connected to the movable wing piece provided in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, for example. After performing the setting for opening control with the movable blade piece as the tilting position, such as the setting of the normal electric operation pattern, the value of the normal process flag is updated to “4”. At this time, for example, when either the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is on, a normal operation pattern in which the period and the number of times of performing the opening control are increased compared to the case where both are off may be set. As a result, in the probability change state and the short time state, the period and number of times that the second start winning opening is opened based on the fact that the base map display result is “per base map” increases, and the game ball starts the second start. It becomes easier to enter the winning entrance. If the normal map display result is “general map loss”, the value of the general map process flag is updated to “0”.

  The ordinary electric accessory actuating process of step S144 is executed when the value of the normal process flag is “4”. In this ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the movable wing piece provided in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B is moved from the vertical position to the tilt position in response to the variable display result in the ordinary game being “per game”. Thus, setting for changing the second start winning opening from the closed state to the open state is performed. For example, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, a drive control signal for driving the ordinary electric accessory solenoid is generated according to the setting of the ordinary electric action pattern set in the ordinary symbol stop process in step S143. You can make it. Further, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the elapsed time after the ordinary electric accessory solenoid is driven to open the second start winning opening is measured, and the elapsed time corresponds to the ordinary electric operation pattern. A determination is made as to whether or not When the elapsed time reaches the open period, the second start winning opening is closed from the open state by stopping the driving of the solenoid for the ordinary electric accessory and returning the movable blade piece from the tilting position to the vertical position. Set to change to the state. At this time, the value of the normal process flag may be updated to “0”.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball processing in step S18. In the prize ball process shown in FIG. 55, a prize ball number addition process (step S191) and a prize ball control process (step S192) are executed.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball number adding process executed in step S191 of FIG. In this prize ball number addition process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second prize ball payout prohibition flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in an on state (step S321). Here, if the second prize ball payout prohibition flag is in the OFF state in step S321 (step S321; No), the count switch 23 provided corresponding to the big prize opening formed by the special variable prize winning device 7 is used. It is determined whether or not the detection signal is on (step S322). If the detection signal from the count switch 23 is on (step S322; Yes), the value of the total prize ball number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is incremented by 15 (step S323).

  If the second prize ball payout prohibition flag is on in step S321 (step S321; Yes), if the detection signal from the count switch 23 is off in step S322 (step S322; No), or step After the process of S323 is executed, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is in the ON state. (Step S324). Here, if the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step S324; Yes), the value of the total prize ball number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is incremented by 3 (step S325). ).

  If the detection signal from the first start port switch 22 is in the OFF state in step S324 (step S324; No), or after executing the process of step S325, the first control provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 It is determined whether or not the prize ball payout prohibition flag is on (step S326). Here, if the first prize ball payout prohibition flag is off in step S326 (step S326; No), whether or not the value of the winning cumulative number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is “0” or not. Is determined (step S327).

  If the value of the winning cumulative number counter is “0” in step S327 (step S327; Yes), a second start opening switch provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. It is determined whether or not the detection signal from 22B is in an ON state (step S328). Here, if the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is on (step S328; Yes), the value of the total prize ball number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is incremented by 3 (step S329). ).

  If the first prize ball payout prohibition flag is on in step S326 (step S326; Yes), and if the value of the winning cumulative number counter is a value other than “0” in step S327 (step S327; No) When the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in the OFF state (step S328; No), or after executing the process of step S329, the prize ball number adding process is terminated.

  With such a process, when an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening or the big winning opening occurs, the payout of the game ball is prohibited. Therefore, payout for illegal winning can be prohibited, and fraudulent acts on the normal variable winning device 7B can be prevented. Further, when there is a possibility of winning the second start winning opening due to an illegal act, it is possible to prevent the game store from being disadvantaged by not paying out the winning ball based on the winning. If the second prize ball payout prohibition flag is on in step S321, the second prize ball payout prohibition flag is cleared, and in step S326, the first prize ball payout prohibition flag is on. In some cases, the payout based on the abnormal winning may not be performed by clearing the first prize ball payout prohibition flag. Furthermore, the first prize ball payout prohibition flag and the second prize ball payout prohibition flag are not cleared until the power supply is stopped, and then cleared when the power supply is restored. The payout may be prohibited until it is made.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball control process executed in step S192 of FIG. In this prize ball control process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the value of the total prize ball number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is “0” (step S331). Here, if the value of the total prize ball number counter is “0” (step S331; Yes), the prize ball control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the total prize ball number counter is a value other than “0” in Step S331 (Step S331; No), the value of the total prize ball number counter is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “15”). ) It is determined whether or not (step S332). Here, if the value of the total prize ball number counter is larger than the predetermined upper limit value (step S332; Yes), the number of payouts that designates the number of game balls to be paid out as the predetermined upper limit value “15”. Settings for transmitting the specified command are performed (step S333).

  On the other hand, if the value of the total prize ball number counter is equal to or less than the predetermined upper limit value in step S332 (step S332; No), a payout number designation command for designating the number of payouts indicated by the value of the total prize ball number counter Is set to transmit (step S334). For example, in the processing of steps S333 and S334, the storage address (start address) of the payout number designation command table stored in advance in the ROM 101 is designated by the transmission command pointer in the effect control command buffer included in the transmission command buffer. Set to the buffer area. The payout number designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board 15, for example, by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. .

  After executing the processing of steps S333 and S334, the value of the total prize ball number counter is subtracted by the number of payouts specified by the payout number command (step S335), and the prize ball control process is terminated.

  Thus, on the payout control board 15 side, when the payout control microcomputer 150 receives the payout number designation command, the payout motor is arranged so that a game ball as a payout ball designated by the payout number designation command is paid out. 51 is driven.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 58 is executed. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 to the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit).

  Thereafter, a random number update process is executed (step S402), and numerical data indicating a random value counted by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 among various random values used for effect control is displayed by software. Update. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S403). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 19 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 195. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is off in step S403 (step S403; No), the process returns to step S402. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on in step S403 (step S403; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S404), and command analysis processing is executed (step S405). . In the command analysis process executed in step S405, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S405, an effect control process is executed (step S406). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a lighting operation in the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are performed. The contents of the control of the effect operation using the are determined, determined, set according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  After performing the effect control process in step S406, a notification control process is executed (step S407). In this notification control process, in response to the transmission of the first abnormal prize notification designation command or the second abnormal prize notification designation command from the main board 11, for example, a predetermined abnormality notification screen is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, a process for notifying that an abnormality has occurred is executed by outputting a predetermined abnormality notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on the abnormality notification lamp 9 and the like. After performing the notification control process in step S407, the process returns to step S402.

  In the command analysis process of step S405, for example, a pending storage increase display process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 59 is executed. In the reserved memory increase display process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the reserved memory count notification command transmitted from the main board 11 by, for example, checking the effect control command stored in the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is reception (step S151). At this time, if no pending storage number notification command is received (step S151; No), the pending storage increase display process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S151 that the pending storage number notification command has been received (step S151; Yes), one of the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command is selected. It is determined whether the designated command has been received (step S152). Here, it is determined whether or not the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command has been received in the command analysis processing in step S405, and any of the start opening prize designation commands is received. When it is determined that there is a command, a command reception flag corresponding to the received start opening winning designation command may be set to an on state. As an example, when the first start opening prize designation command is received, the first start opening prize designation command reception flag is set to ON, while when the second start opening prize designation command is received, the second start opening prize designation command is set. Sets the specified command reception flag to the on state. In step S152, if either the first start opening prize designation command reception flag or the second start opening prize designation command reception flag is on, it may be determined that the start opening prize designation command has been received.

  If it is determined in step S152 that the start opening winning designation command has been received (step S152; Yes), for example, depending on whether or not the first starting opening winning designation command receiving flag is on, etc. It is determined whether or not the received start opening winning designation command is the first starting opening winning designation command (step S153). At this time, if it is determined that the command is the first start opening winning designation command (step S153; Yes), the reserved storage display in the start winning storage display area 5H is updated corresponding to the increase in the first reserved storage number. Therefore, the first hold display increase update setting is performed (step S154). In this first hold display increase update setting, for example, the first start by the game ball having entered one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H into the first start winning opening. Display setting for changing to blue display is performed according to the establishment of the condition. After performing such first hold display increase update setting, the hold storage increase display process ends.

  When it is determined in step S153 that the command is the second start opening prize designation command (step S153; No), the reserved memory display in the start prize memory display area 5H corresponding to the increase in the second reserved memory number. 2nd hold display increase update setting for updating is performed (step S155). In the second hold display increase / update setting, for example, one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H is used for the second start due to the game ball entering the second start winning opening. Display setting for changing to red display is performed according to the establishment of the condition. After performing such second hold display increase update setting, the hold storage increase display process ends.

  If it is determined in step S152 that the start opening prize designation command has not been received (step S152; No), the hold storage display in the start prize storage display area 5H is displayed correspondingly when there is no start opening prize designation. Display update setting is performed when no start opening winning designation is specified for updating (step S156). In this display update setting when the start opening prize is not specified, for example, a display setting for changing all of the display parts that are displayed in blue or red in the start prize storage display area 5H to gray display, and a start prize storage display. Display setting for changing one of the display parts that are not displayed in the area 5H to gray display is performed. After performing such a display update setting when no start opening prize designation is made, the on-hold storage increase display process is terminated.

  As described above, when the first hold display increase update setting is performed in step S154 and the second hold display increase update setting is performed in step S155, the hold memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. If either of the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command as the start opening winning designation command is normally received, for example, as shown in FIG. In the display area 5H, a first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A based on establishment of the first start condition and a second special figure reservation based on establishment of the second start condition The second reserved memory number, which is the number of stored pending data in the storage unit 151B, can be displayed in an identifiable manner.

  On the other hand, in step S156, the display update setting is performed when no start opening prize designation is made, so that when the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, the first start opening prize that becomes the start opening prize designation command is received. Based on the determination that neither the designation command nor the second start opening prize designation command has been received, the display mode of the hold storage display in the start prize storage display area 5H is changed to a predetermined display mode, for example, By displaying in gray as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the total reserved memory number can be specified, but the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number can be displayed so that they cannot be specified. After that, if the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, if the start opening winning designation command is normally received, one of the processes of steps S154 and S155 is executed. A new display corresponding to the received start opening winning designation command can be added while maintaining the display mode in the gray display area. As an example, when the hold memory display as shown in FIG. 60 (B) is being performed, if the hold memory number notification command is received after the first start opening winning designation command is normally received, By performing the first hold display increase update setting in S154, as shown in FIG. 60C, a blue display corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening is added.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S406 of FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the following processes in steps S160 to S166 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example. Run.

  The fluctuation start command reception waiting process in step S160 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In this variation start command reception waiting process, the image display device 5 is changed depending on whether one of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is received as the variation start command transmitted from the main board 11. Variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area, and “left” and “right” colored symbol display areas 5A. 5B includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of the color symbol in any one of 5B. At this time, if it is determined that variable display is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B In order to perform various production operations including variable display of decorative designs and color designs in response to The process includes determining a pattern, a notice pattern, and the like, and setting a design variation control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, and the like based on the determination result. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The decorative symbol variation process in step S162 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the decorative symbol variation process, various controls are performed from the symbol variation control pattern and the preview effect control pattern in accordance with the value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 (effect control process timer value). Processing for reading out data and performing various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols is included. As an example, when any of Super CPS 6-1 and Super CPS 6-3-1 to Super CPS 6-3-3 is set as a design variation control pattern in the decorative design variation setting process in Step S161, the effect control is performed. The CPU 120 checks the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 via a predetermined input port included in the I / O 125, and the operation detection signal is in an on state within a predetermined period in which the reach selection effect can be executed. It is determined whether or not At this time, if the operation detection signal is turned on, for example, super CPS 6-1 and super CPS 6-3-1 to super CPS 6-3-3 are switched to super CPS 6-5-1 to super CPS 6-5-3. Thus, the production operation in the reach selection production is changed. Note that the symbol variation control patterns of the super CPS 6-1 and the super CPS 6-3-1 to the super CPS 6-3-3 used before the operation detection signal is turned on have some effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. (For example, an image prompting the operation of the operation button 30) may be displayed, or an effect image may not be displayed. As another example, when any of the notice CYP3-1-1, notice CYP3-2-1 and notice CYP3-3-1 is set as the notice effect control pattern in the decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161. The production control CPU 120 checks the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 via a predetermined input port included in the I / O 125, and the operation detection signal is turned on within a predetermined period in which the notice effect can be executed. It is determined whether or not a state has been reached. At this time, if the operation detection signal is turned on, for example, the notice CYP3-1-1 is switched to the notice CYP3-1-2, the notice CYP3-2-1 is switched to the notice CYP3-2-2, and the notice CYP3-3 is selected. For example, by changing -1 to the notice CYP3-3-2, the presentation operation in the notice effect is changed. Note that the notice effect control patterns of the notice CYP3-1-1, notice CYP3-2-1, and notice CYP3-3-1 used before the operation detection signal is turned on are in the display area of the image display device 5. An effect image (for example, an image prompting the operation of the operation button 30) may be displayed, or an effect image may not be displayed. Here, when the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-1-1, notice CYP3-2-1, notice CYP3-3-1 displays an effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, each notice effect control. A common effect image may be displayed in the pattern, or different effect images may be displayed. After performing such effect control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the symbol variation control pattern, or when a decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Correspondingly, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The decorative symbol variation end process in step S163 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The decorative symbol variation end process includes a process of determining whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. At this time, if it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to “4” when the variable display result specified from the hit start designation command is “big hit”. Is done. On the other hand, when the variable display result specified from the hit start designation command is “small hit”, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the hit start designation command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the variable display result being “lost”.

  The big hit control effect process in step S164 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the effect processing during the big hit control, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The sound effect sound signal is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the sound effect signal to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on by outputting the electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14. This includes processing for controlling various performance operations in the big hit gaming state such as turning off / off / flashing. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” in response to, for example, receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The effect process during small hit control in step S165 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In the effect process during the small hit control, for example, an effect control pattern is set in response to the variable display result being “small hit”, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the image display device 5. Displaying sound in the area, outputting sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting sound effect signals to the sound control board 13, and playing the game effect lamp 9 and decorations by outputting electric decoration signals to the lamp control board 14 Processing for controlling various performance operations in the small hit gaming state such as turning on / off / flashing the LED is included. As an example, in the effect processing during small hit control in step S165, the effect control pattern of the hit start CST2-2 and the hit control CRE1-2 shown in FIG. Reading from the pattern table 182 and setting the production control process timer. Thereafter, various settings for controlling the rendering operation may be performed in accordance with the control data read from the rendering control pattern according to the rendering control process timer value. The effect operation executed by such a setting may be an effect operation common to both the accuracy and the small hit, which may be executed even when the big hit type is “Accuracy”. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process in step S166 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this ending effect process, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting sound effect signals to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and decoration LEDs are turned on / off by output of electric decoration signals to the lamp control board 14. This includes processing for controlling various performance operations corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, such as blinking / flashing. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the end of the effect operation.

  62 and 63 are flowcharts showing an example of the decorative symbol variation setting process executed in step S161 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display result is “losing” by, for example, reading the EXT data of the variable display result notification command (FIG. 62). Step S501). At this time, if the variable display result is “losing” (step S501; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data of the variation pattern designation command, the designated variation pattern sets the variable display mode of the decorative symbol to “non-reach”. It is determined whether or not it is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case of "" (step S502).

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step S502; Yes), the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern that executes a specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye”. It is determined whether or not (step S503). As an example, if it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, if the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA 1-7 (see FIG. 7). It is determined that the variation pattern is to execute a specific effect of “end of development chance”.

  When it is determined in step S503 that the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect of “end of development chance eyes” (step S503; Yes), the final stop symbol constituting any of the development chance eyes HC1 to HC8 and A combination of determined decorative symbols is determined (step S504). As an example, in the process of step S504, the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 24D is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1- 5, The combination of FZ1-6 is determined as a definitive decorative symbol.

  If it is determined in step S503 that the pattern is not a variation pattern that executes the specific effect of “end of development chance” (step S503; No), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination Is determined (step S505). As an example, in the process of step S505, first, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 24A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 24B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-2, the decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. At this time, based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, by referring to the left / right output determination table 161 as shown in FIG. It is determined which of a plurality of types. Thereafter, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 24C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, a random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the extracted random number value SR1-3 and the left / right outcome type DC1-1, the final stop symbol determination table 160C is referred to determine a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  In this way, in the process of step S505, with reference to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161, the decorative symbols to be the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are determined. Therefore, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols does not become a reach combination or a jackpot combination, and even if the combination is not a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. The development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in (B), the chances of success TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG.

  When it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; No), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting a reach combination is determined (step S506). As an example, in the process of step S506, first, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 27A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the same decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 are displayed. decide. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 27B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number values SR1-3, the decorative symbols that become the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ2- The design difference from the decorative design of 3 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined in this way, a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined.

  Thus, in the process of step S506, first, using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, “left” and “right” other than the “middle” ornament symbol display area 5C where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last. The decorative symbols to be the left and right final stopped symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are determined. After that, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the decorative symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2- in the “medium” ornament symbol display area 5C where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last. 1, the design difference with the decorative design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the decorative design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference.

  If the variable display result is other than “losing” in step S501 (step S501; No), the variable display result is “small hit” or the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is It is determined whether it is one of the “surprise” or other than that (step S507). At this time, when the variable display result is “small hit”, or when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” (step S507; Yes), for example, the change pattern designation command By reading the EXT data or the like, it is determined whether the specified variation pattern is one of the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 or any other variation (step S508). Here, as shown in FIG. 7, all the variation patterns of the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-4 specify that the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is “non-reach”. Therefore, when it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is any of the special PG 1-1 to special PG 1-4 (step S508; Yes), the process proceeds to step S503 shown in FIG. 62, and step S504 is performed. The final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is determined by one of the processes of S505. If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is one of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4, it is designated by the variation pattern designation command in step S503 shown in FIG. If the variation pattern is the variation pattern of the special PG1-4 (see FIG. 8), it is determined that the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye”.

  If it is determined in step S508 in FIG. 63 that the variation pattern is other than the variation pattern of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 (step S508; No), the designated variation pattern is special PG2-1 to special PG2-. It is determined whether it is any of the three fluctuation patterns or any other pattern (step S509). Here, as shown in FIG. 8, each of the variation patterns of the special PG2-1 to the special PG2-3 designates that the “normal” reach effect is performed after the decorative display variable display state is set to the reach state. ing. Therefore, when it is determined in step S509 that the variation pattern is any of the special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 (step S509; Yes), the process proceeds to step S506 shown in FIG. The final decorative symbol that constitutes the final stop symbol is determined.

  If it is determined in step S509 in FIG. 63 that the variation pattern is not the variation pattern of special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 (step S509; No), the designated variation pattern is special PG3-1 to special PG3-. One of the three variation patterns. Here, as shown in FIG. 8, all of the variation patterns of the special PG 3-1 to the special PG 3-3 are a combination of the fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result of the decorative graphic, and any one of the chance chance items TC 1 to TC 4. It is specified to do. Corresponding to the designation of any one of the special PG3-1 to special PG3-3 variation patterns, the combination of the finalized decorative symbols to be the final stop symbols constituting any of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is determined. (Step S510). As an example, in the process of step S510, the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 28C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1 and FZ4- that become any one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4 are obtained. 2, The combination of FZ4-3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  In step S507, when the variable display result is not “small hit” and the big hit type is not “surprise” (step S507; No), among the cases where the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type is “ It is determined whether any one of “normal big hit” and “third probability variation” or any other one (step S511). At this time, when the big hit type is “ordinary big hit” or when the big hit type is “third probability variation” (step S511; Yes), the final decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol constituting the normal big hit combination. Is determined (step S512). As an example, in the process of step S512, the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 28A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which are any of the normal jackpot combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  When the big hit type is neither “normal” nor “third probability variation” in step S511 (step S511; No), the big hit type corresponds to either “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”. Then, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the probability variation big hit combination is determined (step S513). As an example, in the process of step S513, the final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 28B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163B on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which become one of the probable big hit combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  The change specified by the change pattern specifying command after executing any of the processes in steps S504, S505, and S506 in FIG. 62 or after executing any of the processes in steps S510, S512, and S513 in FIG. It is determined whether or not the pattern is a variation pattern having a reach selection effect (step S514). At this time, if the variation pattern has a reach selection effect (step S514; Yes), the reach effect determination table corresponding to the variable display result is selected and set as a use table (step S515). Specifically, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the jackpot reach effect determination table 172A shown in FIG. 29A is set, and when the variable display result is “lost”, FIG. The reach reach determination table 172B shown in (B) is set.

  Following the processing of step S515, the reach effect performed after the reach selection effect is executed is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S516). Specifically, for example, numerical data indicating the random effect SR9 for determining the reach effect is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. After the reach selection effect is executed by referring to the jackpot reach effect determination table 172A or the reach reach effect determination table 172B set in step S515 based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR9. The reach production to be performed is determined as one of the reach productions A to C.

  After executing the process of step S516, the specific effect setting process is executed (step S517). FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the specific effect setting process executed in step S517. In this specific effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern having no specific effect (step S551). At this time, if the variation pattern has no specific effect (step S551; Yes), the specific effect setting process is terminated as it is.

  When it is determined in step S551 that the variation pattern has a specific effect (step S551; No), the specific effect is any one of “slip”, “pseudo-continuous”, “intro”, or those It is determined whether it is a specific effect other than (step S552). At this time, if it is any one of the specific effects of “slip”, “pseudo train”, and “intro”, the specific effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specific effect is selected and set as the use table (step S553). . As an example, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 30A is set in the case of the “slip” specific effect, and the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. The specific effect pattern determination table 164B is set, and when the specific effect of “Intro” is set, the specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 30C is set.

  Following the process of step S553, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S554). For example, in the case of a specific effect of “slip”, numerical data indicating the random value SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. To do. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6-1, the specific effect pattern is changed to any one of the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164A set in step S552. To decide. In the case of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, numerical data indicating the second specific effect pattern determination random value SR6-2 is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR6-2, the specific effect patterns are stored in the pseudo sequences TP2-1 to TP2-3 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164B set in step S552. Decide on one. In the case of the “Intro” specific effect, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. At this time, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the previous effect buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is read. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR6-3 and the previous effect buffer value, when the variation pattern is other than non-reach PA 1-6, Based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6-3, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164C.

  After the determination in step S554, it is determined whether or not the specific effect is “intro” (step S555). If the specific effect is “intro” (step S555; Yes), step S554 is performed. The previous effect buffer value is updated with the previous effect buffer update setting value in the specific effect pattern determination table 164C in accordance with the specific effect patterns of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 determined in (Step S556). For example, if the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-1 is determined in step S554, the previous effect buffer value is updated to “1”. On the other hand, when the specific effect pattern of the intro TP3-2 is determined in step S554, the previous effect buffer value is updated to “2”. When the specific effect pattern of the intro TP3-3 is determined in step S554, the previous effect buffer value is updated to “3”.

  By executing the processing of step S556 in this way, the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 prepared for each type of effect operation corresponding to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect of “intro” is displayed. Each time it is determined, the previous effect buffer value corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the determined intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 can be updated. That is, each time the effect operation in the specific effect of “Intro” is determined as one of a plurality of types, the determined type of effect operation can be stored as the previous effect buffer value in an updatable manner. And in the process of step S554, when it is a fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-6, the previous effect buffer value is read and the determination using the specific effect pattern determination table 164C as shown in FIG. Thus, the specific effect pattern can be determined so that the same type of effect operation as the type of effect operation stored as the previous effect buffer value is not executed.

  When it is determined in step S552 that the specific effect is other than “slip”, “pseudo-ream”, or “intro” (step S552; No), it is determined in step S555 that the specific effect is other than “intro”. (Step S555; No), or after executing the process of step S556, the specific effect is any one of “slip”, “pseudo-ream”, “expansion chance”, or other It is determined whether the specific effect is (step S557). At this time, if it is a specific effect other than “slip”, “pseudo-run”, and “expansion chance” (step S557; No), the specific effect setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is one of the specific effects of “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, and “expansion chance” (step S557; Yes), the temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop in the specific effect is determined. (Step S558), the specific effect setting process is terminated.

  In the process of step S558, as an example, in the case of a specific effect of “slip”, a temporary stop symbol determination table according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 32E based on the specific effect pattern determined in step S554. One of 166A to 166D is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to any of the set temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D based on the extracted random number SR3, the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1, the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2, the right temporary stop symbol 1 -3, the decorative symbol to be one of the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4 is determined.

  As another example, when the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is set, first, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous change is set to a constant M based on the specific effect pattern determined in step S554. For example, the constant M is set to “1” in the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1, and the constant M is set to “2” in the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-2. In the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-3, the constant M is set to “3”. At this time, a variable N indicating the determined number of temporary stop symbol combinations is set to “0”. If the fluctuation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 33A is selected and set as a use table, while the fluctuation pattern is super PA3-4, super Any of PA3-8, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1, Super PS3-4, Super PS4-4, Special PG1-3 In such a case, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in FIG. 33B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-1, by referring to either the set temporary stop symbol determination table 167A or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 The combination of left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. At this time, the variable N is incremented by 1 and updated, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M in this way, the process of step S558 is terminated. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 33C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR4-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3 that become any one of the pseudo consecutive chance eyes GC1 to GC8. -2, KZ3-3 combination is determined. At this time, the variable N is incremented by 1 and updated, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M in this way, the process of step S558 is terminated. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. 33 (D) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-3, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, KZ4, which becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. -2 and a combination of KZ4-3 are determined. After determining the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3 in this way, the process of step S558 is terminated.

  As another example, in the case of a specific effect of “Development Chance”, the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 35 is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 based on the extracted random value SR3, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3 that become one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 are displayed. Determine the combination.

  After executing the specific effect setting process as described above at step S517 shown in FIG. 62, the changing promotion effect setting process is executed (step S518). FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing promotion effect setting process executed in step S518. In this changing promotion effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise” or not. (Step S571). At this time, if the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise” (step S571; No), the changing promotion effect setting processing is ended as it is.

  When it is determined in step S571 that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “probable” (step S571; Yes), the variation shown in FIG. The promotion effect execution determination table 165A is selected and set as a use table (step S572). Subsequently, for example, numeric data indicating the random value SR5 for promotion effect execution determination is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S573). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 extracted in step S573, by referring to the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A set in step S572, the big hit type is “normal” and “first certain change”. The presence or absence of the changing promotion effect is determined according to which one of the “third probability change” (step S574). At this time, if it is determined that there is no changing promotion effect (step S575; No), the changing promotion effect setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S574 that there is a changing promotion effect (step S575; Yes), a temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop in the changing promotion effect is determined (step S576). Then, the changing promotion effect setting process ends. In the process of step S576, as an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 36 is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the promotion effect is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 based on the extracted numerical data indicating the random number SR2, the decorative symbols determined as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are displayed. The combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 is determined according to the symbol number.

  After executing the changing promotion effect setting process as described above in step S518 shown in FIG. 62, the notice effect setting process is executed (step S519). FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the notice effect setting process executed in step S519. In the notice effect setting process, first, the notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 37 is selected and set as a use table (step S591). Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S592). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR7 extracted in step S592, referring to the notice pattern type determination table 170, there is no notice or the notice pattern types of notice CY1 to notice CY3 according to the variation pattern. (Step S593). At this time, if it is determined that there is no notice (step S594; Yes), the notice effect setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S593 that any of the notice pattern types of notice CY1 to notice CY3 (step S594; No), according to the decided notice pattern type, the notice pattern determination table 171A shown in FIG. 39, one of the notice pattern determination table 171B shown in FIG. 39 and the notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 40 is selected and set as a use table (step S595). That is, when the notice pattern type of the notice CY1 is determined in step S593, the notice pattern determination table 171A is set. When the notice pattern type of the notice CY2 is decided, the notice pattern determination table 171B is set. When the notice pattern type of the notice CY3 is determined, the notice pattern determination table 171C is set. Thereafter, the notice pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S596), and the notice effect setting process is terminated.

  In the process of step S596, for example, when the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY1, for example, a random number SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern is obtained from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, for example. The numerical data indicating is extracted. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR8-1, the notice pattern determination table 171A set in step S595 is referred to so that there is no notice or the notice patterns of the notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4. Decide on either.

  As another example, when the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY2, for example, a numerical value indicating the random value SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Extract data. Then, by referring to the notice pattern determination table 171B set in step S595 based on the numeric data indicating the extracted random number SR8-2, no notice or notice patterns of notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4. Decide on either.

  As another example, when the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY3, a random value SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern is shown from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, for example. Extract numerical data. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR8-3, the notice pattern determination table 171C set in step S595 is referred to, so that there is no notice or notice patterns of notice YP3-1 to notice YP3-3. Decide on either.

  After executing the notice effect setting process as described above in step S519 shown in FIG. 62, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S520). At this time, the effect control CPU 120, for example, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, the reach effect determined in step S516, the specific effect pattern determined in step S554 shown in FIG. One of a plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 41A is used corresponding to the presence / absence of the promotion effect during variation determined in step S574 shown. Select and set as a pattern. Further, for example, in response to the notice pattern determined in step S596 shown in FIG. 66, any one of a plurality of kinds of notice effect control patterns stored in the notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. Select and set as usage pattern.

  Following the processing in step S520, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 corresponding to the effect control process timer setting value indicated in the symbol variation control pattern set in step S520. Is set (step S521). Then, for example, by supplying a display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern to the display control unit 123, the “left” and “middle” provided in the display area of the image display device 5 are provided. , The decorative symbols start to change in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the color symbols change in either the “left” or “right” colored symbol display areas 5A, 5B. Is set to start the variation of various symbols in the image display device 5 (step S522). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation processing (step S523), and the decorative symbol variation setting process is terminated.

  In the decorative symbol variation setting process, for example, a process of determining a confirmed color symbol may be executed before the process of step S522 is executed. At this time, depending on which of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is transmitted from the main board 11, the determined color symbols in the “left” and “right” color symbol display areas 5A and 5B are displayed. decide. For example, in the case of determining the determined color symbol in the “left” color symbol display area 5A according to the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, “yellow”, “green”, “red”, “ In the case of determining the color design of “blue” and determining the determined color design in the “right” color design display area 5B, the color design of “red” or “blue” may be determined.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol changing process executed in step S162 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the effect control process timer value provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 to respond to the operation of the operation button 30 by the player. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a button effective period during which the effect image can be switched (step S351). As an example, when a notice display effect of “mail display” is executed, two or more decorative design display areas from when the effect image prompting the operation of the operation button 30 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 are displayed. The period until the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed becomes the button effective period. In addition, when the reach selection effect is executed, the period from when the effect image that prompts the operation of the operation button 30 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until the scroll display of the reach image is ended, The button is valid. Note that the display control process timer determination value used when determining whether or not the button is valid is different for each variation pattern.

  If it is within the button effective period in step S351 (step S351; Yes), it is determined whether or not the operation button 30 has been operated by the player (step S352). Specifically, it is determined whether or not an operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 to the effect control board 12 is turned on in accordance with the operation of the operation button 30 by the player. If it is determined in step S351 that the button is not within the valid period (step S351; No), or if it is determined in step S352 that the player has not operated the operation button 30 (step S352; No). The production control process timer value is updated, for example, by subtracting 1 (step S353). At this time, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the timer determination values by comparing the updated effect control process timer value with various timer determination values indicated by the effect control pattern (step S354). ). And if it does not correspond to any timer judgment value (step S354; No), the decorative symbol variation process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S352 that the player has operated the operation button 30 (step S352; Yes), or if it matches the timer determination value in step S354 (step S354; Yes), Various control data (any of display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code) stored in the effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value is read (step S355). Here, when the plurality of timer determination values indicated by the effect control pattern in the process of step S354 match the effect control process timer value, a plurality of stored timer determination values are associated with each other. What is necessary is just to read control data by the process of step S355. Then, it is determined whether or not the control data read in step S355 is an end code (step S356). At this time, if it is determined that the code is not an end code (step S356; No), after performing an effect control command process for performing a command or setting according to the control data read in step S355. (Step S357), the decorative symbol changing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S356 that it is an end code (step S356; Yes), for example, by setting a predetermined timer initial value in the effect control process timer, the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set. This is performed (step S358). Then, the value of the decorative symbol process flag is updated to “3”, which is a value corresponding to the processing at the end of decorative symbol variation (step S359), and then the decorative symbol variation processing is terminated.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control command process executed in step S357 of FIG. In the effect control command process, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the type of control data read out in the process of step S355 shown in FIG. 67 from display control data, audio control data, and lamp control data. (Step S451). Then, it is determined whether or not the type of the control data specified in step S451 is display control data (step S452).

  If it is determined in step S452 that it is display control data (step S452; Yes), a display control command created according to the read display control data is transmitted to the display control unit 123 (step S453). When it is determined in step S452 that the display control data is not included (step S452; No), after executing the process of step S453, it is determined whether an abnormality notification for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is being performed. (Step S454). As an example, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not an abnormality notification flag provided in an effect control flag setting unit or the like of the RAM 122 is on. If it is off, it is assumed that no abnormality is being reported.

  If no abnormality is being notified in step S454 (step S454; No), it is determined whether or not the type of control data specified in step S451 is voice control data (step S455). At this time, if the type of the control data is voice control data (step S455; Yes), the voice data created according to the read voice control data is transmitted from the output port included in the I / O 124 to the voice control board 13. By doing so (step S456), the sound corresponding to the sound control data read from the effect control pattern is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. If it is determined in step S454 that an abnormality is being reported (step S454; Yes), if it is determined in step S455 that it is not voice control data (step S455; No), or the process of step S456 is performed. After the execution, it is determined whether or not abnormality notification is being performed in the same manner as the process of step S454 (step S457).

  If the abnormality is not being notified in step S457 (step S457; No), it is determined whether or not the type of control data specified in step S451 is lamp control data (step S458). At this time, if the type of the control data is lamp control data (step S458; Yes), the lamp data created according to the read lamp control data is transmitted from the output port included in the I / O 125 to the lamp control board 14. By doing so (step S459), the lighting operation of the game effect lamp 9 corresponding to the lamp control data read from the effect control pattern is performed. If it is determined in step S457 that the abnormality is being notified (step S457; Yes), if it is determined in step S458 that it is not voice control data (step S458; No), or the process of step S459 is performed. After the execution, the effect control command process is terminated.

  In this way, in the effect control command process, when the abnormality is being notified, the process of step S456 is not executed, and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is output as a sound according to the effect control pattern. Prioritize over. Further, when the abnormality is being notified, the process of step S459 is not executed, and the abnormality notification lighting in the game effect lamp 9 or the like is given priority over the lighting operation according to the effect control pattern. If it is determined in step S454 that the abnormality is being notified, the effect control drawing process may be terminated and the determination in step S457 may not be performed. On the other hand, the process of step S453 is executed regardless of whether the abnormality is being notified or not, so that even when the abnormality is being notified, the variable display effect including the variable display of decorative symbols is continued. Can be executed

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit control effect processing executed in step S164 of FIG. In the effect processing during the big hit control, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S601). At this time, if a hit end designation command is received (step S601; Yes), a setting for ending the big hit effect that is performed corresponding to the big hit gaming state is made (step S602), and the value of the production process flag is set. After updating to “6” corresponding to the ending effect process (step S603), the big hit control effect process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S602, a predetermined display control command is supplied to the display control unit 123, a predetermined sound effect signal is transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a predetermined electrical decoration signal is transmitted. It is only necessary to perform control to end the effect operation that is the effect during the big hit by transmitting to the lamp control board 14 or the like.

  If no hit end designation command is received in step S601 (step S601; No), it is determined whether or not a promotion effect flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S604). . Here, the promotion effect in-progress flag is set to an on state by executing a process of step S612 described later, while being cleared to an off state by executing a process of step S616. Even when the process of step S602 is executed, the promotion effect flag may be cleared and turned off.

  If the flag for promotion effect is OFF in step S604 (step S604; No), for example, depending on whether or not the effect control process timer value matches a predetermined effect start determination value, etc. It is determined whether or not the execution timing has come (step S605). Here, in the big hit state of 2 rounds, since the execution period of each round is short, the effect control process timer value may be set so as not to reach the effect start determination value.

  When it is determined in step S605 that it is the execution timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S605; Yes), the jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 31B is selected as the use table. Set (step S606). Subsequently, for example, numeric data indicating the promotion effect execution determination random value SR5 is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S607). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 extracted in step S607, the big hit type is “normal”, “first positive change” to “third positive change” by referring to the big hit middle promotion effect execution determination table 165B. Depending on whether it is, it is determined whether there is a jackpot promotion promotion effect, and if there is a jackpot promotion promotion decision, whether to make a jackpot promotion promotion success effect or a jackpot promotion promotion failure, etc. A determination is made regarding the execution of the effect (step S608).

  When it is determined in step S605 that it is not the execution timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S605; No), or when it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect in step S608 (step S609; Yes). ), A setting is made to execute an effect operation that is an effect during the big hit according to the number of rounds that is the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state (step S610). As an example, in the processing of step S610, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is specified from the big win opening open designation command for 15 rounds big hit or sudden / small hit transmitted from the main board 11. When the number of rounds is updated, the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated number of rounds is read from the various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. 42, and the effect control process timer is set. Then, according to the control data read from the effect control pattern according to the effect control process timer value, supplying a display control command to the display control unit 123, transmitting a sound effect signal to the sound control board 13, By transmitting a signal to the lamp control board 14, an effect operation that is an effect during a big hit is executed. After executing the processing of step S610, the big hit control effect processing is terminated.

  In the processing of step S610, when setting corresponding to the fact that the designation command for opening the big prize opening for accuracy / small hit is transmitted from the main board 11, it is executed immediately before the big hit gaming state is entered. Depending on the variation pattern type into which the variation pattern in the variable display of decorative symbols is classified, settings for executing different rendering operations may be performed. As an example, a variation pattern type common to the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the variable display result is “small hit”, such as the variation pattern types of special CA4-1, special CB4-1, and special CC4-1. 42. After the decorative symbols are variably displayed with the variation patterns classified into the following, when the two rounds are controlled to the big hit state, the effect control patterns of the hit start CST2-2 and hit control CRE1-2 shown in FIG. The effect control patterns to be sequentially used are selected and read out, and the effect operation is set according to the effect control patterns. On the other hand, the decorative pattern by the variation pattern classified into the dedicated variation pattern type only when the big hit type is “surprise”, such as the variation pattern types of special CA4-2, special CB4-2, and special CC4-2. When the game is controlled to the 2 round big hit gaming state after the variable display is performed, as the effect control pattern that sequentially uses the effect control pattern of the hit start CST2-1 and the hit control CRE1-1 shown in FIG. Select and read out, and set the production operation according to those production control patterns.

  If it is determined in step S608 to execute the jackpot promotion effect (step S609; No), settings for starting the jackpot promotion effect are performed (step S611). As an example, in the process of step S611, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is specified from the big win opening open designation command for 15 round big hits transmitted from the main board 11. Then, an effect control pattern for executing the promotion effect corresponding to the specified number of rounds is read from the various effect control pattern tables 182 and an effect control process timer is set. At this time, for example, the value of the notification content buffer (notification content buffer value) provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is set according to which of the big success promotion effect and the big success failure promotion effect is executed. It may be. As a specific example, the notification content buffer value is set to “1” when executing the jackpot promotion promotion success effect, while the notification content buffer value is set to “0” when executing the jackpot promotion promotion effect. Set to. Then, after setting the promotion effect in-progress flag to the on state (step S612), the big hit control effect processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S604 that the flag indicating that the promotion effect is on (step S604; Yes), for example, does the effect control process timer value match the effect end determination value indicated in the effect control pattern? Depending on whether or not, it is determined whether or not the end timing of promotion effect during jackpot is reached (step S613). At this time, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S613; No), settings are made to control the rendering operation that becomes the jackpot promotion effect (step S614). As an example, in the process of step S614, according to the control data read from the effect control pattern according to the effect control process timer value, the display control command is supplied to the display control unit 123, and the sound effect signal is sent to the sound control board 13. It is only necessary to control the production operation that becomes the promotion effect during the big hit, for example, by transmitting the electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14. After executing the process of step S614, the big hit control effect process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S613 that it is the end timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S613; Yes), settings are made to end the jackpot promotion effect (step S615), and the flag for the promotion effect is cleared. Then, after the off state is set (step S616), the big hit control effect processing is terminated.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect process executed in step S166 of FIG. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the ending effect flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S631). Here, the ending effect in-progress flag is set to an on state by executing a process in step S638 described later, and is cleared to an off state by executing a process in step S641.

  When the ending effect flag is OFF in step S631 (step S631; No), for example, by reading the EXT data of the hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the big hit type is “normal”. It is determined whether or not it is a certain big hit (step S632). At this time, if it is not the normal big hit (step S632; No), it is determined whether or not the big hit type is “third probability variation” (step S633). If the jackpot type is “third probability variation” (step S633; Yes), the promotion success effect has been executed from the notification content buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. It is determined whether or not (step S634). As an example, when the notification content buffer value is “1”, it is determined that the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed, and when the notification content buffer value is “0”, the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed. What is necessary is just to determine that it is not.

  When it is determined in step S633 that the jackpot type is other than “third probability variation” (step S633; No), or when it is determined in step S634 that the promotion success effect has been executed (step S634). ; Yes), a setting for starting a production operation to be a predetermined non-promotion ending production is performed (step S635). As an example, in the process of step S635, it is determined whether the 15 round big hit state or the 2 round big hit state ends by reading the EXT data of the hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11. Then, in accordance with the determination result of the jackpot gaming state to be ended, an effect control pattern that does not execute the promotion effect is read from various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. 42, and an effect control process timer is set.

  If it is determined in step S634 that the promotion success effect has not been executed (step S634; No), a setting is made to start the effect operation that becomes the ending promotion success effect (step S636). As an example, in the process of step S636, in response to the end of the 15th round big hit state, an effect control pattern for executing the promotion success effect is read from various effect control pattern tables 182 and an effect control process timer is set. .

  If it is determined in step S632 that it is a normal big hit (step S632; Yes), a setting is made to start an effect operation that becomes an ending promotion failure effect (step S637). As an example, in the process of step S637, in response to the end of the 15th round big hit state, an effect control pattern for executing the promotion failure effect is read from various effect control pattern tables 182 and an effect control process timer is set. .

  After executing any of the processes in steps S635 to S637, the ending effect flag is set to the on state (step S638), and the ending effect process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S631 that the ending effect flag is on (step S631; Yes), for example, the effect control process timer value matches the effect end determination value indicated in the effect control pattern. It is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect depending on whether or not (step S639). Here, the ending effect is an effect operation executed in response to the end of the big hit gaming state, including an unpromoted ending effect, an ending promotion success effect, and an ending promotion failure effect.

  If it is determined in step S639 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (step S639; No), settings for controlling the effect operation that becomes the ending effect are performed (step S640). As an example, in the process of step S640, the display control command is supplied to the display control unit 123 according to the control data read from the effect control pattern according to the effect control process timer value, and the sound effect signal is sent to the sound control board 13. It is only necessary to control the rendering operation as an ending effect by transmitting the illumination signal or transmitting the illumination signal to the lamp control board 14. After executing the process of step S640, the ending effect process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S639 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (step S639; Yes), for example, the ending effect flag is cleared and turned off, and the display control unit 123 Ending effects such as supplying a predetermined display control command, transmitting a predetermined sound effect signal to the sound control board 13, and transmitting a predetermined electrical signal to the lamp control board 14. Is set to end the process (step S641). At this time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is a value corresponding to the variation start command reception waiting process (step S642), and then the ending effect process ends.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of the notification control process executed in step S407 of FIG. In the notification control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first abnormal prize notification designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S531). At this time, if a first abnormal winning notification designating command is received (step S531; Yes), a notification is made that an abnormality has occurred in response to the detection of a game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening. First abnormal winning notification setting is performed (step S532). As an example, in the process of step S532, a display control command for designating the display of the abnormality notification screen is transmitted to the display control unit 123 to display the abnormality notification screen on the image display device 5 and to the voice control board 13. On the other hand, by transmitting audio data designating the output of the abnormality notification sound, the abnormality notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lamp data designating the abnormality notification lighting is transmitted to the lamp control board 14, thereby playing the game. The abnormality lamp is turned on by the effect lamp 9 or the like. Here, the abnormality notification screen is superimposed and displayed by combining with an effect image including a decorative design being displayed on the image display device 5. Thereby, for example, when the decorative design is being variably displayed, the variable display effect including the variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the variation pattern is continuously performed, while the notification image corresponding to the abnormality notification screen is displayed as an image. It is displayed superimposed on the device 5. At this time, for example, by setting the abnormality notification flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like of the RAM 122 to the on state, abnormality notification is being performed in the processing of steps S454 and S457 shown in FIG. Can be specified.

  When the first abnormal prize notification designation command is not received in step S531 (step S531; No), or after the process of step S532 is executed, the second abnormal prize notification designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. It is determined whether or not there is (step S533). At this time, if a second abnormal winning notification designating command is received (step S533; Yes), a second for notifying that an abnormality has occurred in response to the detection of a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. Abnormal winning notification setting is performed (step S534). As an example, in the process of step S534, the same display control command, audio data, and lamp data as in step S532 are transmitted, so that the abnormality notification screen is superimposed on the image display device 5 and abnormalities are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A notification sound is output, and the abnormality notification lighting is performed by the game effect lamp 9 or the like. As another example, in the process of step S534, the second start winning opening is obtained by transmitting a display control command, audio data, and lamp data different from the display control command, audio data, and lamp data transmitted in step S532. A notification is made so that it is possible to distinguish whether the occurrence of an abnormality corresponding to the detection of the game ball that has entered the game or the occurrence of an abnormality corresponding to the detection of the game ball that has entered the big prize opening. You may make it perform. Also in the process of step S534, for example, by setting the abnormality notification flag to the ON state, it is possible to specify that the abnormality notification is being performed in the processes of steps S454 and S457 shown in FIG. Good. When the second abnormal winning notification designating command is not received in step S533 (step S533; No), after the processing of step S534 is executed, the notification control processing is terminated.

  FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing a lighting operation example in the game effect lamp 9, a sound output operation example in the speakers 8L and 8R, and a display operation example in the image display device 5.

  FIG. 72A shows an operation example in a normal operation in which no abnormality corresponding to the game ball that has entered the second start winning opening or the big winning opening has occurred. At this time, on the main board 11 side, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the total number of reserved memories is a value other than “0” in step S231 shown in FIG. 49 (step S231; No), after performing the transmission setting of various commands for use at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol in step S279 shown in FIG. 51, the command control processing in step S17 shown in FIG. 45 is executed. Thereby, for example, whenever a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming control microcomputer 100, the first variation start command, the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, or the variable display result notification command is sent from the main board 11 to effect control. The data is sequentially transmitted to the substrate 12.

  On the side of the production control board 12, the production control CPU 120 of the production control microcomputer 120 transmits the first variation start command or the second variation start command transmitted from the main substrate 11 at the timing T10 shown in FIG. Reception is completed for each of the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command. Correspondingly, in the decorative symbol variation setting process of step S161 shown in FIG. 61, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a variable display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command, In addition to the decorative symbol, a temporary stop symbol that is stopped and displayed during variable display of the decorative symbol is determined, and an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is set.

  When display control data is included in the effect control pattern set in this way (step S452 in FIG. 68; Yes), the display corresponding to the effect control pattern is displayed from the effect control microcomputer 120 to the display control unit 123. When the control command is transmitted (step S453), the display screen of the image display device 5 performs a variable display effect as an effect including a variable display of decorative symbols according to the variation pattern. Further, if it is during normal operation and no abnormality is being notified (step S454; No), if the audio control data is included in the effect control pattern (step S455; Yes), audio control is performed from the effect control microcomputer 120. By transmitting sound data corresponding to the effect control pattern to the substrate 13 (step S456), the speakers 8L and 8R perform sound effects by sound output corresponding to the variation pattern. In addition, if it is during normal operation and no abnormality is being reported (step S457; No), when the lamp control data is included in the effect control pattern (step S458; Yes), the effect control microcomputer 120 uses the lamp. When the lamp data corresponding to the effect control pattern is transmitted to the control board 14 (step S459), the game effect lamp 9 performs the lamp effect by the lighting operation corresponding to the variation pattern.

  Thus, in response to the start of variable display of decorative symbols during normal operation, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 start an effect operation according to the variation pattern. . Thereafter, for example, in response to the fact that predetermined control data serving as an end code has been read from the effect control pattern, or the decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received, the decorative symbol can be variably displayed. At the same time, the rendering operation according to the variation pattern is also terminated.

  FIG. 72 (B) shows an operation example when an abnormality occurs in which an abnormality corresponding to the game ball that has entered the second start winning opening or the big winning opening has occurred. In this case, if the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the value of the special figure process flag is less than “4” in step S172 shown in FIG. 46 on the main board 11 side (step S172; No). The abnormality determination corresponding to the determination period other than the big hit gaming state is performed. That is, when the game ball that has entered the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 and the detection signal is turned on (step S173; Yes), the transmission setting of the second abnormal winning notification designating command is performed ( In step S174), the payout of a prize ball as a prize for the game ball that has entered the special winning opening is restricted as invalid (step S175). In addition, if it is determined in step S172 that the value of the special figure process flag is “4” or more (step S172; Yes), or the value of the special figure process flag is determined to be less than “4”. (Step S172; No), when the game ball that has entered the big prize opening is not detected by the count switch 23 and the detection signal is in the OFF state (Step S173; No), the value of the ordinary process flag is set in Step S176. If it is determined that the numerical value is other than “4” (step S176; No), the abnormality determination corresponding to the determination period other than the open state of the second start winning opening is performed. That is, when a game ball that has entered the second start winning port is detected by the second start port switch 22B and the detection signal is turned on a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) (step S177; Yes, step S179; Yes) The transmission setting of the first abnormal winning notification designating command is set (step S180), and the payout of the winning ball as a prize for the game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening is restricted as invalid (step S181).

  On the side of the production control board 12, the production control CPU 120 of the production control microcomputer 120 transmits the first abnormal winning notification designation command and the second abnormality transmitted from the main board 11 at the timing T20 shown in FIG. One of the winning notification designation commands is received. Correspondingly, for example, when a first abnormal winning designation command is received (step S531 in FIG. 71; Yes), a setting for notifying an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening is performed (step S532). ). On the other hand, when the second abnormal winning notification designation command is received (step S533; Yes), a setting for notifying an abnormal winning to the big winning opening is performed (step S534).

  As an example, in the processes of steps S532 and S534, a common display control command corresponding to the reception of the first abnormal winning designation command or the second abnormal winning notification designation command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, whereby the image is displayed. An abnormality notification screen including a notification image H01 as shown in FIG. 73 (A) is displayed on the display device 5. At this time, the notification image 01 is displayed in a superimposed manner on the effect image being displayed on the image display device 5, for example, on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is possible to visually recognize the decorative pattern and the like. Further, in the processes of steps S532 and S534, the common sound data designating the output of the abnormality notification sound is transmitted to the sound control board 13 to output the abnormality notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lamp control board. By transmitting the common lamp data designating the abnormality notification lighting to 14, the abnormality notification lighting is performed by the game effect lamp 9 or the like.

  As another example, in the process of step S532 and the process of step S534, among the display control commands, audio data, and lamp data, all or some of them may be transmitted. For example, in the process of step S532, a display control command for designating the display of the notification image H10 as shown in FIG. 73C is transmitted, while in the process of step S534, the notification as shown in FIG. 73C. A display control command for designating display of the image H11 is transmitted. Accordingly, whether the occurrence of an abnormality corresponding to the detection of the game ball that has entered the second start winning opening, or the occurrence of an abnormality corresponding to the detection of the game ball that has entered the large winning opening, Notification can be made in a distinguishable manner.

  After the abnormality notification is in this way, the first variation start command or second variation start command, variation pattern designation command, variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11 at the timing T21 shown in FIG. 73 (B). Complete reception for each. On the display screen of the image display device 5 based on the effect control pattern set corresponding to this, the decorative symbol variable display of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is started. That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), the notification image H01 is superimposed and displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect control microcomputer 120 applies an effect to the display control unit 123 in step S453 of FIG. By transmitting a display control command in accordance with the control pattern, the variation of the decorative symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  On the other hand, the type of control data read from the effect control pattern is the voice control data or lamp control in response to the abnormality being reported (step S454; Yes and step S457; Yes in FIG. 68). If it is data, the processing of step S456 and step S459 is not executed. For this reason, the abnormality notification sound is continuously output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the sound output according to the variation pattern is not performed. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is continuously lit for abnormality notification, and the lighting operation according to the variation pattern is not performed.

  As described above, even when the decorative symbols are variably displayed, the abnormality notification such as the display of the abnormality notification screen, the output of the abnormality notification sound, and the abnormality notification lighting can be executed. The abnormality notification such as the display of the abnormality notification screen, the output of the abnormality notification sound, and the abnormality notification lighting may be continuously performed until the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Alternatively, all or some of the abnormality notifications such as the display of the abnormality notification screen, the output of the abnormality notification sound, and the abnormality notification lighting are stopped when the elapsed time from the start of the abnormality notification reaches a predetermined time. You may control so that it is.

  Next, a specific example of the rendering operation by displaying various rendering images centering on the variable display of decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 will be described. The effect control board 12 responds to the reception of the first change start command and the second change start command transmitted from the main board 11 based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, for example, The control CPU 120 supplies a predetermined display control command to the display control unit 123 in step S522 shown in FIG. 62, for example, so that “left”, “middle”, “right” provided in the display area of the image display device 5 are used. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of the decorative symbol is started.

  Hereinafter, a specific example in the case where the variable display result of the decorative design is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “losing” will be described. FIG. 74 shows a case where the specific effect of “slip” is executed when the specific effect is not executed among the cases where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”, or when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. In this case, a display operation example in the case where a specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye” is executed is shown. For example, when the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effect as shown in FIGS. 74 (C1) and (C2) is not executed, and the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4. 74 is specified when the “slip” specific effect as shown in FIGS. 74E1 to 74E4 is executed, and when the non-reach PA1-5 variation pattern is specified, FIG. 74D1 to FIG. When a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” as shown in (D6) is executed, and a variation pattern of non-reach PA1-7 is designated, “expansion chance” as shown in FIGS. 74 (F1) to (F6) This is a case where a specific effect of “eye end” is executed. In FIG. 74 (A), for example, the decorative symbols are displayed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” in response to the start of variation of special symbols in the special symbol game. The fluctuation starts. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 74B, the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L.

  When the specific effect is not executed or when the “slip” specific effect is executed, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 24A in step S505 shown in FIG. In response to the determination of the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” as the stopped symbol FZ1-1, the decorative symbol stop display as shown in FIG. 74 (B) is performed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 30A, if the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed when the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”, the specific design is performed. Since the effect pattern is always determined to be only the slip TP1-1 and the specific effect of "slip" is executed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R, the decorative symbol is re-fluctuated at high speed. The decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L are not changed depending on the specific effect of “slip”. Further, when the specific effect of “end of development chance” is executed, the development chance eye HC6 is obtained by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 24D in step S504 shown in FIG. In response to the determination that the combination of the decorative symbols constituting the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6 is determined, the decorative symbol stop display as shown in FIG. Will be done. When the “pseudo-ream” specific effect is executed, the decorative design indicating the number “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 in the process of step S505 shown in FIG. Based on the symbol FZ1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 33A is referred to in step S558 shown in FIG. In response to the determination as the stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3, the decorative symbol stop display as shown in FIG. 74 (B) is performed.

  Thereafter, when the specific effect is not executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 74 (C1), the decorative symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. ), And after the stop display (temporary stop display) of the decorative symbol indicating the number “4” in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C as shown in FIG. 74 (C2), the non-reach combination is obtained. The confirmed decorative symbol is stopped (final stop). At this time, the final decorative symbol shown in FIG. 24B is displayed in step S505 shown in FIG. 62 as the final decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R or the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. By referring to the determination table 160B, or referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 24C together with the left / right outcome determination table 161 shown in FIG. 25, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 and the middle final stop It is determined as symbol FZ1-3.

  On the other hand, when the specific effect of “pseudo train” is executed, as an example, the number “7” is shown in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R as shown in FIG. 74 (D1). After the decorative symbol is stopped (temporary stopped), the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C as shown in FIG. 74 (D2). ), The decorative symbol that becomes the pseudo-continuous chance GC6 is stopped and displayed. At this time, for example, temporary stop display such as decorative pattern fluctuation display may be performed, and then the decorative symbols may be changed again in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as shown in FIG. 74 (D3). . Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 74 (D4) to (D6), decorative symbols indicating the numbers “6”, “7”, and “4” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. Are sequentially displayed in a stop (temporary stop display), and then the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped (final stop display).

  When the specific effect of “slip” is executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 74 (E1), the decorative symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R ( After the temporary stop display), as shown in FIG. 74 (E2), the decorative symbol is re-varied at high speed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74 (E3), the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is changed so that the decorative symbol indicating the numeral “7” is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. Here, as shown in FIG. 74 (E1), the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R is, for example, the right final stop symbol FZ1- determined in step S505 shown in FIG. 2 is determined by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A shown in FIG. 32A in step S596 shown in FIG. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 74 (E4), after the decorative symbol indicating the number “4” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C, the non-reach combination is confirmed. The decorative design is stopped (final stop display).

  In the case where a specific effect of “end of development opportunity” is executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 74 (F1), a decorative pattern indicating the number “7” is displayed in the “right” decorative pattern display area 5R. After the stop display (temporary stop display), as shown in FIG. 74 (F2), the decorative symbol indicating the numeral “7” is also stopped (temporary stop display) in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C. As a result, the decorative symbols constituting the development opportunity eye HC6 are temporarily displayed. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 74 (F3), an effect display is performed such that the temporarily stopped decorative design rotates in a certain direction, and then, as shown in FIG. 74 (F4), the decorative design is displayed. An effect display is performed so that the player can expect that the variable display state becomes a reach state. Here, if the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped from the effect display as shown in FIG. 74 (F4) is rotated in the reverse direction, the development to reach the reach state occurs. In this example, there is no development that reaches the reach state, and for example, as shown in FIG. 74 (F5), after the effect display is performed so that the decorative symbols displayed in the temporarily stopped state are returned to the original state. The confirmed decorative symbols constituting the development chance eye HC6 are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  FIG. 75 shows a display operation example in the case where the specific effect of “intro” is executed, among the cases where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. For example, when the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-6 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the “Intro” specific effect as shown in FIG. 75 is executed. In FIG. 75 (A), for example, the decorative symbols are displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in response to, for example, the start of special symbol variation in the special symbol game. The fluctuation starts. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 75B, the decorative symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the “right” decorative symbol is displayed. The decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the area 5R, and the character image CH1 is displayed at a display position corresponding to the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. Note that the character image CH1 only needs to appear as an effect image in a reach effect that is executed when the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state later.

  Subsequently, for example, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), after the effect display is performed to update the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. For example, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), in accordance with the change of the character image CH1, in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, the update display to the decorative symbol indicating the number “4” is “right”. In the decorative symbol display area 5R, the updated display of the decorative symbol indicating the number “3” is performed. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 75 (E), after the effect display that further updates the decorative symbols updated and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R is performed, For example, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), in accordance with the change of the character image CH1, in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, the updated display to the decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is changed to the “right” decorative symbol. In the symbol display area 5R, an update display to the decorative symbol indicating the number “1” is performed. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 75 (G), the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are updated in accordance with the change of the character image CH1. For example, as shown in FIGS. 75 (H) to (K), in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, decorative symbols indicating numbers “1” to “3” are updated and displayed in a predetermined order. Thereafter, in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, for example, as shown in FIG. 75 (L), an effect display that updates the decorative symbol is performed, and then “3” as shown in FIG. 75 (M). A decorative symbol indicating the number is temporarily stopped and displayed. When the specific effect of “intro” is completed in this way, for example, as shown in FIG. 75 (N), after the character image CH1 is erased, the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  FIG. 76 shows an example of the display operation when the specific effect of “intro” is executed among the cases where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”. For example, by using a change pattern designation command, Super PA3-3, Super PA3-7, Super PB3-3, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-7, Super PA5-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Super PS3-3 3. When one of the variation patterns of Super PS4-3 is designated, the “Intro” specific effect as shown in FIG. 76 is executed. In the display operation example shown in FIG. 76, the same effect display as in FIGS. 75A to 75L is performed in the portions of FIGS. Thereafter, in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, for example, as shown in FIG. 76 (M), the decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is temporarily stopped and displayed, so that the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L is displayed. The variable display state becomes the reach state together with the decorative symbols that are temporarily displayed at. When the specific effect of “intro” is completed in this way, for example, as shown in FIG. 76 (N), after the character image CH1 is erased, a reach effect corresponding to the change of the variable display state to the reach state is started. After that, a confirmed decorative pattern that becomes a reach combination, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a jackpot combination, and the like are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  77 to 80 show display operation examples when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise”. In FIG. 77 (A), for example, in response to the start of fluctuation of special symbols in the special symbol game, the decorative symbols are displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The fluctuation starts. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L.

  When a specific effect of “slip” is executed, for example, when the variation pattern is Super PA4-2, as an example, as shown in FIGS. 77 (C1) to (C3), “ After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, changing the decorative symbols again in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, and then stopping and displaying them. The effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed so that the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. Further, when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, for example, when the variation pattern is Super PA 4-4, for example, as shown in FIGS. 77 (D1) to (D5), After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, an effect display that causes the decorative symbols to change again (pseudo continuous variation) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is displayed. Done. Thereafter, the decorative symbols indicating the number “6” are aligned and stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. It reaches the reach state. Further, when a specific effect of “Development Chance” is executed, for example, when the variation pattern is Super PC 4-1, for example, as shown in FIGS. 77 (E1) to (E6). In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol combination that will be the development chance HC6 is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), and then the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped is rotated in the direction of reversing. After such an effect display is performed, the decorative display variable display state becomes the reach state.

  After reaching the reach state as shown in FIGS. 77 (C3) and 77 (D5), for example, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), the variation speed of the decorative symbols in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C. Decreases. For example, when the variation pattern is one of normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, “6” is displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C as shown in FIG. 78 (B). A “normal” reach effect that is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) together with the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R having the numbers “left” and “right” is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 78 (B), in response to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, the decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped and displayed, but the variable display result is “lost”. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 78 (H), after displaying the effect image indicating that the numeral “5” is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C where “Middle” is displayed, “Middle” is displayed. The decorative symbols other than the number indicating “6” are stopped and displayed in the “decorative” decorative symbol display area 5C, such as the decorative symbol displaying the number “5” is stopped in the decorative symbol display area 5C. Thus, the confirmed decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed, and the variable display of decorative symbols may be terminated. When one of the reach production α1 to the reach production α3, the reach production β1 to the reach production β3, or the reach selection production is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. The variation speed of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5C rises again, and various reach effects are displayed. For example, in reach effect β1, after a character image CH2 as shown in FIG. 78D is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds. In the case of any one of the reach effects α1 to the reach effects α3, after the character image CH1 as shown in FIG. 78 (E) is displayed, the reach effect display as shown in FIG. 78 (F) proceeds. To do. In the reach effect α1, for example, as shown in FIG. 78 (G), a decorative design that is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first-stage effect display appears. In the example shown in FIG. 78 (G), the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed in correspondence with the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, but the variable display result is “lost”. In such a case, the fixed decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed, and the variable display of decorative symbols may be terminated. On the other hand, in the reach effect α2 and the reach effect α3, for example, as shown in FIGS. 78 (H) and (I), the process proceeds to the second stage effect display. On the other hand, in reach effect β2 and reach effect β3, after a character image CH3 as shown in FIG. 78 (J) is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds.

  When the second stage effect display progresses as shown in FIG. 78 (I), if the reach effect α2 is reached, for example, as shown in FIG. A decorative pattern to be displayed appears. When the variable display result is “losing”, for example, as shown in FIG. 79B, the displayed decorative symbols are not changed, and the fixed decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination are stopped and displayed. What is necessary is just to finish the variable display of a decoration design. On the other hand, in the reach effect α3, for example, as shown in FIGS. 79B to 79D, the process proceeds to a third stage effect display (also referred to as “relief effect”). Then, a decorative pattern that is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the third stage of effect display appears. Here, for example, when it is determined in step S574 shown in FIG. 65 that the changing promotion effect is not to be executed, as shown in FIG. Stopped display (final stop display) as a confirmed decorative pattern. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the changing promotion effect, after temporarily displaying the decorative symbol that becomes a normal jackpot combination as shown in FIG. 79 (F), FIG. 79 (G) As shown in Fig. 5, the same pattern is changed again in the state where the same decorative symbols are aligned in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, in the case where the changing promotion effect is executed in response to the big hit type being “first probability change”, for example, as shown in FIG. 79 (H), the decorative design displayed temporarily stopped is changed again. After that, the promotion success effect during change is performed to stop and display the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the probability variation big hit combination. Note that when the promotion promotion effect during change is executed, after the re-change of the decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 79 (G), the normal big hit combination is confirmed as in FIG. 79 (F), for example. What is necessary is just to stop-display a decorative design.

  In the reach selection effect, first, the effect display control read from the symbol variation control patterns such as the super CPS 6-1 and the super CPS 6-3-1 to the super CPS 6-3-3 determined in step S520 shown in FIG. According to the data or the like, for example, as shown in FIGS. 80A to 80C, the reach images showing the reach effects A to C are scroll-displayed in a roulette shape. In the image display shown in FIGS. 80 (A) to 80 (C), scroll display is performed at low speed fluctuations to introduce reach images of reach effects A to C. Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 80A to 80C, a star is displayed in the display area at the lower center of the image display device 5, and the reliability (variable) in each reach effect is determined by the number of stars. The display result may be a “big hit”). Specifically, when a reach image indicating the reach effect A is displayed, two stars are displayed as shown in FIG. 80A, indicating that the reliability is the lowest. Further, when the reach image indicating the reach effect B is displayed, as shown in FIG. 80B, three stars are displayed, and the reliability is higher than when the reach image indicating the reach effect A is displayed. Is expressed as high. When the reach image indicating the reach effect C is displayed, as shown in FIG. 80C, three stars are displayed, indicating that the reliability is highest. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain the reliability of each reach production. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 80D, an effect image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 is displayed. In the image display shown in FIG. 80 (D), the reach images of the reach effects A to C introduced in FIGS. 80 (A) to (C) are scroll-displayed with high speed fluctuation, and when this high speed fluctuation is started, The operation of the operation button 30 by the player becomes effective. Then, when the player operates the operation button 30 within a predetermined period, and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 to the effect control board 12 is turned on accordingly, for example, the effect control CPU 120 Are the symbol variation control patterns such as Super CPS 6-1 and Super CPS 6-3-1 to Super CPS 6-3-3, among the symbol variation control patterns of Super CPS 6-5-1 to Super CPS 6-5-3. As shown in FIG. 80 (E), for example, by switching to the symbol variation control pattern (super CPS6-5-2) corresponding to the reach effect (for example, reach effect B) determined in step S516 shown in FIG. One reach image (for example, reach image showing reach effect B) among reach images showing effects A to C is fixedly displayed. Here, “determined display” means that a reach image indicating a reach effect that develops after execution of the reach selection effect is stopped and displayed in a display area in front of the center of the image display device 5. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 changes the symbol variation control pattern such as super CPS 6-5-1 to super CPS 6-5-3 to super CPS 6-6-1 to super CPS 6-6-3 or super CPS 6-7-1. -1 to Super CPS 6-7-3-1 and Super CPS 6-7-1 to Super CPS 6-7-3-2 of the variation control pattern reach effect determined in step S516 shown in FIG. By switching to a symbol variation control pattern (super CPS 6-6-2, super CPS 6-7-2-1, super CPS 6-7-2-2) corresponding to (for example, reach effect B) or the like, FIG. ), An effect image of the reach effect (for example, reach effect B) indicated by the reach image that is confirmed and displayed in the reach selection effect is displayed. By, for example, it is, reach demonstration is executed. Here, the period from the start of the reach selection effect to the end thereof may be different for each variation pattern, but may be constant. If the period from the start of the reach selection effect to the end is fixed, and the button operation is performed relatively early after the start of the reach selection effect, the button operation as shown in FIG. The effect image may be displayed for a long period of time, and conversely when the button operation is performed at a relatively late time, the effect image after the button operation may be displayed for a short period of time. Further, when the button operation is not performed within the button effective period described above, the effect image before the button operation may be switched to the effect image after the button operation and displayed at the end of the button effective period. Alternatively, in the symbol variation control pattern table shown in FIG. 41, a symbol variation control pattern capable of executing both the effect display by the effect image shown in FIG. 80D and the effect display by the effect image shown in FIG. When the button operation is not performed within the button effective period, even if the button effective period ends, the pattern change control pattern of super CPS 6-5-1 to super CPS 6-5-3 shown in FIG. 41 is switched. After the reach selection effect, the super CPS 6-6-1 to super CPS 6-6-3, super CPS 6-7-1-1, super CPS 6-7-2-1 and super CPS 6 shown in FIG. -7-3-1, Super CPS 6-7-1-2, Super CPS 6-7-2-2, Super CPS 6-7-3-2 It may be. The reach image used in the reach selection effect is a part of the moving image used when executing the reach effect stored in the CGROM included in the display control unit 123, for example, a plurality of still images constituting the moving image. One of the still images or a moving image composed of a part of the plurality of still images may be modified by enlarging or reducing it, or when performing a reach effect. It may be an image provided separately from the moving image to be used and allowing the player to recognize the same image. After that, if the symbol variation control pattern does not execute the changing promotion effect (super CPS 6-7-2-2), the process proceeds to the image display shown in FIG. 79 (E) and executes the changing promotion effect. If it is (Super CPS 6-7-2-1), the process proceeds to the image display shown in FIGS.

  FIG. 81 shows a display operation example in the case where the notice effect of “mail display” is executed. In this display operation example, first, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of special symbols in a special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas are displayed. As shown in FIG. 81 (B), the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed at 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Start fluctuation. Thereafter, for example, the information is read from the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 decided in step S520 shown in FIG. 62 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2 decided in step S596 shown in FIG. In accordance with the effect display control data and the like, for example, as shown in FIG. 81C, an effect image YH1 that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 is displayed. Then, when the player operates the operation button 30 within a predetermined period, and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 to the effect control board 12 is turned on accordingly, for example, the effect control CPU 120 By switching the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 to the notice CYP3-2-2, the effect image YH2 indicating the mail message as shown in FIG. Change the direction. On the other hand, when the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period, the effect image YH1 is deleted as shown in FIG. 81 (E), for example, without switching the notice effect control pattern, The notice effect ends. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 81 (F), the decorative symbol variable display proceeds, such as temporarily displaying the decorative symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L.

  FIG. 82 shows a display operation example when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. In FIG. 82 (A), for example, in response to the start of fluctuation of special symbols in a special symbol game, the decorative symbols are displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The fluctuation starts. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (B) to 82 (D), decorative symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “5”, and “3” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. Are sequentially displayed in a stop (temporary stop display), and then the confirmed decorative symbol that becomes the chance of chance TC1 is stopped (final stop display). At this time, as a big hit effect in the two round big hit state, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (E), an effect image informing the transition to a special effect mode such as the LIVE mode is displayed. As an ending effect in response to the end of the two-round big hit state, for example, an effect image as shown in FIG. 82 (F) is displayed, and the display enabling recognition of the LIVE mode is shown in FIG. 82, for example. As shown in (G), the display is kept displayed even after the next decorative pattern change is started.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, in step S238 shown in FIG. 49, it is determined whether or not the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result matches the jackpot decision value data, thereby displaying the variable display result. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit” is determined before the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In the process of step S268 shown in FIG. 51, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is changed based on the determination that the big hit flag is OFF in step S261 corresponding to the determination result that the control is not set to the big hit gaming state. It is determined whether or not to reach a reach state. In the process of step S273, the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol is selected from a plurality of types based on the determination result of whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, the determination result of whether or not to reach the reach state, and the like. decide. Subsequently, in the process of step S276, based on the determination result in step S273, the decorative pattern variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types. Thereafter, on the side of the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 responds to a first change start command or a second change start command, a change pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11. 62, the decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161 shown in FIG. 62 and the decorative symbol variation changing process in step S162 shown in FIG. 67 are executed, so that the decorative symbol is variably displayed in accordance with the determination result in step S276. Control for executing various performance operations is performed.

  Here, one of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F and FIGS. 13A to 13C is set in step S262 shown in FIG. The variation pattern type determined by referring to step S273 includes the variation pattern type for executing the reach selection effect, such as the variation pattern type of the super CS 3-1. In addition, the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C are determined by referring to any one set in step S270 shown in FIG. 51 in step S273. The variation pattern type includes a variation pattern type for executing divided display effects, such as the variation pattern type of the super CS 2-1. Therefore, for example, when the random display value MR1 matches the big hit decision value data in step S238 shown in FIG. 49 and the variable display result is decided to be “big hit”, or the reach state is reached in step S268 shown in FIG. When the reach determination result indicating the presence is obtained, in step S273, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of variation pattern types including the variation pattern type for executing the reach effect display effect. The change pattern type determination in step S273 is performed regardless of whether or not the reach selection display effect is executed.

  For example, when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” in step S239 shown in FIG. 49, and the variable pattern type for executing the reach selection effect display is determined in step S273 shown in FIG. In step S276, after sequentially displaying a plurality of types of reach images, one reach image is confirmed and displayed, and thereafter, a variation pattern for executing the reach effect indicated by the reach-displayed reach image is determined. The determination of the variation pattern in step S276 is performed regardless of whether or not the reach selection effect is executed.

  Thus, after determining whether or not to execute the reach selection effect by determining the variation pattern type, by determining the variation pattern included in the variation pattern, the reach selection effect is performed when the reach selection effect is performed. A suitable variation pattern can be selected, and a variety of variation patterns can be selected even when the reach selection effect is not executed. Therefore, a variety of effects can be executed to improve the game entertainment.

  On the main board 11 side, the CPU 103 executes the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 45 based on the transmission setting in step S279 shown in FIG. A variation pattern designation command that can identify the variation pattern determined in step S1 is transmitted. On the side of the effect control board 12, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation selection pattern is to execute the reach selection effect in step S514 shown in FIG. 62, the variable display result is “big hit” or “lost”. Correspondingly, after setting either one of the jackpot reach effect determining table 172A shown in FIG. 29A or the reach reach effect determining table 172B shown in FIG. 29B, the reach selection effect is set in step S516. The reach production performed after the execution is determined as one of the reach productions A to C. In this way, since the reach effect to be performed after the reach selection effect is executed is performed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 or the like, it is developed from the reach selection effect without increasing the processing load on the main board 11. It is possible to improve game entertainment by giving variations to reach production.

  If it is determined in step S514 shown in FIG. 62 that the variation pattern is to execute the reach selection effect, the decorative symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 67 is executed in accordance with the symbol variation control pattern determined in step S520. Thus, the reach selection effect is executed in the display area of the image display device 5. In this reach selection effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 80A to 80C, the same image as the reach image used in a plurality of types of reach effects (for example, reach effects AC) is reduced and scrolled. Is displayed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a player from misidentifying which reach production will be developed, and it is easy to grasp what kind of reach production may be developed during the execution of reach selection production. .

  The production control CPU 120 checks the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 in step S352 shown in FIG. 67 during execution of the reach selection production, and corresponds to the operation detection signal being turned on. As shown in FIG. 80 (E), one reach among a plurality of types of reach images (for example, reach images showing reach effects A to C) by switching the symbol variation control pattern in steps S355 and S357. Display the image. This makes it possible to execute the reach selection effect as if the player is involved in the selection of the reach effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

  When it is determined in step S268 shown in FIG. 51 that the reach state is not set, the process of step S273 is executed using any one of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C set in step S271. Thus, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation pattern including non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-3 that execute a specific effect during variable display of decorative symbols. The determination of the variation pattern type in step S273 is performed regardless of whether or not the specific effect is executed. 51. In step S268 shown in FIG. 51, it is determined that the reach state is not set, and in step S273, the non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-3 variation pattern type for executing the specific effect is determined. When the loss variation pattern determination table 138A is used, a plurality of types of variation patterns such as non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-7 prepared in advance to execute a specific effect by executing the process of step S276. Decide on either. The determination of the variation pattern in step S276 is performed regardless of whether or not the specific effect is executed.

  Here, in response to the determination that the reach state is set in step S268 shown in FIG. 51, the step is performed using one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C set in step S270. By executing the processing of S273, a plurality of types of variation patterns such as normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2, super CS2-1 according to the reach state Decide on either. Further, in response to the determination that the reach state is not set in step S268, the process of step S273 is performed using any one of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C set in step S271. By executing, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns including non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-2 that execute a specific effect during variable display of decorative symbols.

  In addition, in response to the determination to reach the reach state in step S268 shown in FIG. 51, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S273, the loss variation pattern determination table 138B is used to perform step S276. By executing the process, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to “reach” is determined. In addition, it is determined that the reach state is not set in step S268 shown in FIG. 51, and the non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-2 variation pattern type that executes the specific effect in step S273. In response to the determination, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-7 prepared in advance to execute a specific effect by executing the process of step S276 using the loss variation pattern determination table 138A. Is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  In this way, even when the decorative display variable display state does not reach the reach state, for example, it is possible to execute specific effects such as “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, “intro”, and “end of development opportunity”, thereby enabling various effects This can improve the game entertainment. Also, in the processing of step S273 and step S276, the variation pattern type and variation pattern are determined using a different determination table according to whether or not the reach state is determined in step S268, and the reach state is determined. The determination process does not compete between the case where it is and the case where the reach state is not set. Therefore, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type used for determining the variation pattern type can be made common numerical data regardless of the determination result whether or not to reach the reach state, Furthermore, the numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern used for determining the variation pattern can be the common numerical data regardless of the determination result of whether or not to reach the reach state. This reduces the amount of processing in the processing (for example, the main random number updating processing in step S14 shown in FIG. 45) executed to update the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 and the random value MR4, and the program The amount can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to simplify the configuration by preventing the configuration of the random number circuit 104 from becoming complicated and increasing the storage area of the random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 and the like. . Here, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, regardless of the determination result of the presence / absence of the reach state in step S268, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types by the common processing module. In the processes of steps S275 and S276, regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S268, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by the common processing module. Thereby, the amount of programs can be reduced as compared with the case where determination is performed using different processing modules according to the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state.

  In the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. 17A, the non-reach CA1-4 that executes a specific effect when the total number of reserved storage is greater than or equal to a predetermined number compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The table data is configured such that the ratio determined for the variation pattern type is low. As a result, when the number of reserved data in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the average variation time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened, It is possible to reduce winnings in which the start condition is not satisfied.

  In the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, depending on the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state. The table data is configured so that it can be determined as one of the classified variation pattern types. As a result, it is possible to prevent the type of production operation in reach production from being biased to a certain type of production operation different from the design, and various production operations can be executed at a predetermined rate close to the design. Can be improved.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 12 (A) to 12 (F) and FIGS. 13 (A) to 13 (C), depending on the determination result as to which of the multiple types of the big hit type, The table data is configured so that different variation pattern types can be determined. This makes it possible to perform different types of performance operations according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F and FIGS. 13A to 13C, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a short-time state. The table data is configured so that different variation pattern types can be determined depending on whether or not the state is a certain variation state. Thereby, according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, different types of effect operations can be executed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In the first special symbol display device 4, a plurality of game balls are awarded based on the fact that the first start condition is established after the game ball has won the first start prize opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first start condition is established. A special game that variably displays a special symbol to be the first special graphic of the type is executed. In the second special symbol display device 4B, based on the fact that the second starting condition is satisfied after the game ball has won the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting condition is satisfied, A special figure game is executed which variably displays special symbols as a plurality of types of second special figures. In the display area of the image display device 5, for example, in the special game using the first special figure and the second special figure in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Corresponding to the variable display, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are variably displayed. In addition, the CPU 103 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 follows a program read from the ROM 101, for example, a game control timer interruption process shown in the flowchart of FIG. A process for controlling the progress is executed. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 follows the program read from the ROM 121, for example, in the command analysis process of step S405 shown in FIG. 58 or the effect control process process of step S406, etc. The process for controlling the display state of is executed. Then, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first starting condition is determined, or the second starting condition is established. Regardless of whether the variation pattern type of the decorative pattern corresponding to the special figure game using the second special diagram based on the determination is determined, the numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is used. The variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types.

  Thus, after the variation pattern type is determined using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the determination result. By doing so, various rendering operations can be executed based on the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state. On the other hand, even when a special symbol is variably displayed by a plurality of display devices such as the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed in accordance with the variable display, the variation is changed. Numerical data indicating a common random value MR3 is used for pattern type determination. As a result, the amount of processing in the processing (for example, the main-side random value updating processing in step S14 shown in FIG. 45) executed to update the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 is reduced, and the amount of program is reduced. Can be planned.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs the first hold display increase update setting in step S154 shown in FIG. 59, and performs the second hold display increase update setting in step S155, whereby the hold memory count notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is set. If one of the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command, which is the starting opening winning designation command, has been normally received when the is received, for example, as shown in FIG. In the start winning memory display area 5H, the first reserved memory number, which is the number of stored data in the first special figure storage unit 151A based on the establishment of the first start condition, and the second one based on the establishment of the second start condition. The second reserved memory number that is the number of stored hold data in the 2 special figure hold storage unit 151B can be displayed in an identifiable manner. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain the progress of a game correctly.

  Further, the CPU 103 causes the first start winning prize designation command to be transmitted based on the transmission setting in step S206 shown in FIG. 48, and then causes the pending storage number notification command to be transmitted based on the transmission setting in step S209. In addition, after the second start winning port designation command is transmitted based on the transmission setting in step S215, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted based on the transmission setting in step S218. Here, in the case where it is possible to specify which one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied by one production control command together with the total number of stored data that is the total number of stored data, for example, the total reservation When the upper limit value of the stored number is “8”, it is necessary to prepare a total of 16 types of effect control commands of 8 types corresponding to the case where the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied. . On the other hand, if an effect control command that can specify which of the first start condition and the second start condition is established and an effect control command that can specify the total number of reserved memories are prepared separately, the first It is only necessary to prepare a total of 10 types of effect control commands, that is, two types of effect control commands that can specify each of the start condition and the second start condition, and eight types of effect control commands that allow the total reserved memory number to be specified. The types of commands prepared in advance and the storage capacity of the command table can be reduced.

  The production control CPU 120 performs display update setting when no start opening winning designation is made in step S156 shown in FIG. 59, so that when the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, the starting opening winning designation is performed. Based on the determination that neither the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command as the command has been received, the display mode of the hold storage display in the start prize storage display area 5H is predetermined. The display mode is changed to a gray display as shown in FIG. 60B, for example, so that the total reserved memory number can be specified, but the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number cannot be specified. Can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred in the command transmission / reception operation that is performed to display the total number of reserved memories that is the total number of stored pending data.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines that the specific effect pattern is the pseudo-continuous TP2 in step S554 when it is determined that the variation pattern executes the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in the processing of steps S551 and S552 shown in FIG. Steps shown in FIG. 61 in accordance with the symbol variation control pattern determined in step S520 of FIG. 62 in accordance with the determination of any one of −1 to quasi-continuous TP2-3 or the temporary stop symbol determined in step S558. The decorative pattern changing process of S162 is executed. Thus, based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After all the decorative symbols are changed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is possible to execute a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect in which the effect display changed again is performed a predetermined number of times. Then, in response to the determination that the reach state is set in step S268 shown in FIG. 51, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A set in step S270 for use in the determination in step S273. ~ 135C, any of the variation pattern types classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach state after executing the specific effect of "pseudo-continuous" Table data is configured so that it can be determined. In this way, for example, it varies depending on the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the reach state instead of the type of effect operation in the specific effect such as whether or not to execute the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. By determining the variation pattern type using the determination table that classifies the pattern type, it is possible to prevent the type of production operation in the reach production from being biased to a certain type of production operation unlike the design, various It is possible to improve amusement entertainment by executing a large production operation at a predetermined rate close to the design.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, for example, the CPU 103 opens the big prize opening in step S251 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the maximum number of times is set to “15”, the processing of steps S114 to S117 shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, for example, based on the fact that the CPU 103 has set the maximum number of winning prize opening opening to “2” in step S251 shown in FIG. Then, the process is controlled to the two round big hit state by executing the processing of steps S114 to S117 shown in FIG. Then, based on the fact that the big hit type is determined to be “surprise” in step S249 shown in FIG. 49, the big hit variation pattern type determination set in step S262 for use in the determination in step S273 shown in FIG. In the tables 132D, 132H, and 132I, for example, the big hit type such as the special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CC4-1, and special CC4-2 variation pattern type is “accurate”. The table data is configured so as to include a variation pattern type different from the case of other than the above. In this way, when the big hit type is “accuracy”, it is determined that the variation pattern type or the fluctuation pattern is different from that other than “surprise accuracy”. Despite being controlled in the round big hit state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrusted by performing the same production operation as in the case of being controlled in the 15 round big hit state.

  Based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, the CPU 103 executes the small hit release pre-processing in step S118 and the small hit release process in step S119 shown in FIG. Similar to the two round big hit state, the special variable winning device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player, and a variable winning operation is executed. Then, when the small hit gaming state is ended, for example, by not changing the state of the probability change flag or the short time flag in the small hit end processing of step S120 shown in FIG. 47, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed. . Thereby, even when the normal state continues, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for being controlled to the probability variation state and improve the game entertainment.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. 12D, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132H shown in FIG. 13B, and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132I shown in FIG. The table data is configured to include a variation pattern type common to the variation pattern type determined when the variable display result is “small hit”. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether the game is controlled to the big hit state or the small hit game state depending on the variation pattern type, and the expectation for being controlled to the probable state is maintained. Can improve the game entertainment. In addition, when the variable display result is “small hit” and when the big hit type is “surprise”, it is possible to determine the common variation pattern type, so that the variable pattern can be determined Regardless of whether the display result is “small hit” or the big hit type is “surprise”, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced. .

  When the big hit type is “probable”, for example, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern is a plurality of types in steps S508 and S509 shown in FIG. 63, and finally stops according to the determination result. The decorative design that is the design is determined. As a result, when the big hit type is “surprise”, various combinations of confirmed decorative symbols can be stopped and displayed as a variable display result, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 11, a plurality of jackpot types are selected based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And determining whether the jackpot type is a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. The table data is configured so that the rate at which the big hit type is determined to be “accurate” differs from the case of determining whether or not. Thereby, the player's expectation for being controlled to the two round big hit state according to which one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied can be made different, and the game entertainment can be improved. In particular, when the second start condition is satisfied, the big hit type is not determined to be “surprise accuracy”, so that, for example, in the period in which the second start winning opening is easily controlled to the open state such as a probability change state or a short time state, the big hit type It becomes possible to prevent the gaming interests from deteriorating by becoming “surprise”, and to increase the frequency at which the prize balls are paid out in the probability variation state and the short time state.

  The CPU 103 can specify the variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 45 based on the transmission setting in step S279 shown in FIG. A variable display result notification command and a variation pattern designation command capable of specifying a variation pattern are transmitted. On the side of the effect control board 12, for example, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect operation that becomes the notice effect during the variable display of the decorative symbol by executing the notice effect setting process of step S519 shown in FIG. The determination operation and the presentation operation that becomes the notice presentation effect are determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in step S593 shown in FIG. 66, the notice pattern type determination table 170 as shown in FIG. 37 is used to determine one of a plurality of notice pattern types. At this time, the notice pattern types of notice CY1 to notice CY3 are determined. If any one of these is determined, any one of the notice pattern determination tables 171A to 171C as shown in FIGS. 38 to 40 is set in step S595, and then the notice pattern is set to one of a plurality of types in step S596. decide. Then, the symbol variation control pattern and the notice effect control pattern determined in step S520 shown in FIG. 62 corresponding to the specific effect pattern and the notice pattern determined based on the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command. Accordingly, the decorative symbol variation process of step S162 shown in FIG. 61 is executed. In this way, by performing determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the notice effect by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12, the progress of the game is controlled by the CPU 103 etc. on the main board 11 side. It is possible to improve amusement entertainment by executing a variety of presentation operations as a notice effect while preventing an increase in the control burden.

  In the notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 37, table data is configured so that a notice effect with an execution period overlapping with a specific effect is not executed, for example, when a specific effect of “Intro” is executed. Yes. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a plurality of types of performance operations from overlapping, and to prevent a decrease in performance effects due to the player's interest being dispersed.

  In the specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 30C, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6, the intro is determined depending on whether the previous effect buffer value is “1” to “3”. The allocation of the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern to each specific effect pattern of TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 is made different, and is the same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “Intro” executed last time. Table data is configured so as not to be a specific performance pattern. As a result, a variety of performance operations can be caused to appear without causing a bias, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In the notice pattern classification determination table 170 shown in FIG. 37 and the notice pattern determination tables 171A to 171C shown in FIG. 38 to FIG. 40, the notice effect can be executed even when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach”. The table data is configured. As a result, even if the variable display state of the decorative pattern does not reach the reach state, it is possible to execute the effect operation that becomes a notice effect, thereby enhancing the player's expectation for reaching the reach state and improving the game entertainment Can do.

  In the notice pattern determination table 171 </ b> C shown in FIG. 40, when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and is a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed, the variation display state of the decorative symbol is a variation pattern in which the reach state is reached. The ratio of executing the notice effect is lower than that of the time, and the ratio of executing the notice effect is higher than that of the change pattern corresponding to “non-reach” and the specific effect is not executed. Table data is configured. This reduces the case where the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state when the effect operation that becomes the notice effect is executed, and the case where the specific effect is not executed when the effect operation that becomes the notice effect is executed. By further reducing, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for reaching a reach state when a notice effect is performed, and to improve the gaming interest.

  In step S352 shown in FIG. 67, the effect control CPU 120 checks the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 and switches the notice effect control pattern in response to the operation detection signal being turned on. As a result, the presentation operation in the notice effect is changed. Thereby, the notice effect according to the operation by the player is possible, and the game interest can be improved.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs the processing in steps S504, S505, and S506 shown in FIG. 62 based on the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, and the like. By executing the processing of steps S510, S512, and S513 shown in FIG. 63, the final decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. Decide on. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines the decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped and displayed as the effect operation in the specific effect by executing the process of step S558 shown in FIG. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S576 shown in FIG. 65 to determine the decoration pattern of the normal jackpot combination to be temporarily stopped and displayed as the effect operation in the changing promotion effect. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Deciding the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the plurality of decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R while preventing an increase in the control burden for controlling the progress of the game by the CPU 103 or the like on the main board 11 side. Can do.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S558 shown in FIG. 64 when the specific effect of “simulated ream” is executed, thereby combining the temporary stop symbols that become one of the spurious chance chances GC1 to GC8. To decide. Thereby, various entertainment operations can be performed to improve the game entertainment while preventing an increase in control burden for controlling the progress of the game by the CPU 103 or the like on the main board 11 side.

  When the “slip” specific effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S558 shown in FIG. 64 to determine the decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “slip” specific effect. . Thereby, various entertainment operations can be performed to improve the game entertainment while preventing an increase in control burden for controlling the progress of the game by the CPU 103 or the like on the main board 11 side.

  In response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol becoming the reach state, the effect control CPU 120 first uses the final stop symbol determining table 162A in the process of step S506 shown in FIG. The decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R other than the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C to be stopped are determined. After that, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the ornament symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” ornament symbol display area 5C where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last is determined. In addition, in response to the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, the CPU 120 for effect control corresponds to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right appearance determination table in the process of step S505 shown in FIG. By determining the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed with reference to 161, the combination of reach and jackpot is not achieved, and even if it is not the reach combination or jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances shown in FIG. GC1 to GC8, development chance items HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 3B, sudden chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 3C, and a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. Determine the combination of finalized decorative symbols. Thereby, it can prevent giving a player a misunderstanding about whether a special effect is performed.

  When the CPU 120 for effect control is the “first probability change” jackpot type that can execute the promotion effect during the change, the final decoration symbol that becomes the final stop symbol constituting the probability change jackpot combination in step S513 shown in FIG. 63 is displayed. decide. Then, in step S574 of FIG. 65, it is determined whether to execute the changing promotion effect by referring to the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. At this time, if it is determined that the changing promotion effect is to be executed, the decorative symbols constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to in step S576 by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. The decoration design to be temporarily stopped by the promotion effect during change is determined. Thus, even when the “first probability change” jackpot type that can execute the changing promotion effect is provided, a case where the changing promotion effect is executed and a case where the changing promotion effect is not executed are provided. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by enabling various performance operations while preventing an increase in the control burden for controlling the progress of the game.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines a final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol constituting the normal jackpot combination in step S512 of FIG. 63 in the case of the “third probability variation” jackpot type for executing the jackpot promotion effect. . As a result, it is difficult to recognize whether or not to be controlled to the probable change state from the variable display result of the decorative symbol when the notification effect that the probable change state is entered after the control to the big hit gaming state is started. Thus, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification effect and improve the game entertainment.

  In steps S173 and S177 to S179 shown in FIG. 46, in the determination period other than the big hit gaming state, a game ball that has entered the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23, and the second starting winning opening is not in the open state. In the determination period, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in response to the game ball being detected a predetermined number of times by the second start port switch 22B. Then, based on the first abnormal winning notification designation command transmitted corresponding to the transmission setting in step S180, the first abnormal winning notification setting is performed in step S532 of FIG. 71, while the transmission setting in step S174 is performed. Based on the second abnormal winning notification designating command transmitted corresponding to, the second abnormal winning notification setting is performed in step S534 of FIG. Thus, for example, abnormality notification such as display of an abnormality notification screen, output of abnormality notification sound, abnormality notification lighting is performed. At this time, the notification image corresponding to the abnormality notification screen is superimposed on the effect image including the decorative design being displayed on the image display device 5, and the output of the abnormality notification sound and the abnormality notification lighting are continuously performed. Thus, the abnormality notification can be executed even when the decorative symbols are being variably displayed. Thereby, it can alert | report that a prize-winning abnormality generate | occur | produced by the cheating act with respect to a big winning opening and a 2nd start winning opening, and it can prevent fraudulent act reliably. In addition, even when abnormality notification is being performed, the effect operation related to the game such as the variable display of the decorative symbols can be continued, so that the player does not suffer a disadvantage with respect to the effect operation.

  In steps S175 and S181 shown in FIG. 46, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in response to the detection of the game ball by the count switch 23 or the second start port switch 23B, Set the payout to be invalid and limit the payout of prize balls. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball that becomes the winning ball from being illegally paid out based on the abnormal approach of the gaming ball to the second start winning opening or the big winning opening.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. In the above-described embodiment, the reach selection effect has been described on the assumption that reach images showing a plurality of types of reach effects are scroll-displayed, for example, as shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIGS. 83A to 83G, reach images indicating a plurality of types of reach effects may be switched and displayed one by one. In the example shown in FIGS. 83 (A) to 83 (G), at the start of the reach selection effect, an effect display that displays an effect image of a mountain reach effect with a mountain with low reliability is performed, and then a character appears. Then, the effect display that switches the mountain reach production to the ocean reach production with the background of the sea having higher reliability than the mountain reach production is performed, and the effect display that displays the effect image of the marine reach production is performed. Then, when the character appears again, an effect display is made to switch the marine reach production to the space reach production with the universe more reliable than the marine reach production. An effect display to be displayed is performed. Here, when the mountain reach effect is determined as the reach effect performed after execution of the reach selection effect, only the effect display for displaying the effect image of the mountain reach effect shown in FIG. After that, the mountain reach production is executed, and the process proceeds to either of FIGS. 79 (E) and 79 (F). On the other hand, when the marine reach effect is determined as the reach effect performed after the reach selection effect is executed, the reach selection effect is an effect of displaying the effect image of the marine reach effect shown in FIG. It is only necessary to display until the display, and then the marine reach effect is executed to proceed to either of FIGS. 79 (E) and 79 (F). Further, when the space reach effect is determined as the reach effect performed after the reach selection effect is executed, the reach selection effect is performed up to the effect display for displaying the effect image of the space reach effect shown in FIG. 83 (G). After that, the space system reach effect is executed, and the process may proceed to either of FIGS. 79 (E) and 79 (F). This makes it easier for the player to understand what kind of reach production is possible during the reach selection production.

  In this case, as in the above-described embodiment, the determination of the reach effect performed after the execution of the reach selection effect may be performed on the side of the effect control board 12, but it is determined to be performed after the execution of the reach selection effect. The execution time of the reach selection effect differs depending on the type of reach effect, and the display time of the decorative design varies accordingly. From the viewpoint of preventing an increase in the processing load on the effect control board 12, it is preferable that On the substrate 11 side, it is preferable to perform the determination in the variation pattern type determination in step S273 shown in FIG. Specifically, among the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, do not use Super PS3-1 to Super PS3-4 and Super PS4-1 to Super PS4-4, which have been described as executing the reach selection effect. In addition, the reach selection effect is not executed in the non-reach variation pattern, the normal reach variation pattern, and the special variation pattern, and the reach selection effect is executed in the super reach variation pattern. Of the super reach, only the mountain reach effect is executed in the change pattern of reach effects α1 to α3, and the effect images shown in FIGS. 83 (A) to 83 (D) are displayed in the change pattern of reach effect β1. After the effect display is performed, the marine reach effect may be executed. Furthermore, in the variation pattern of the reach effect β2, the space system reach effect may be executed after the effect display for displaying the effect images shown in FIGS. 83 (A) to 83 (G) is performed. In step S274 shown in FIG. 51, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A, 132B shown in FIGS. 12A, 12B, 12E, and 12F including the variation pattern types of the super CS 3-1. Instead of 132E and 132F, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 232A, 232B, 232E, and 232F shown in FIGS. 84A to 84E that do not include the variation pattern type of the super CS3-1 are also used. 85 (A) to (C) which do not include the variation pattern type of the super CS2-1 instead of the variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C for reach shown in FIGS. 16 (A) to (C) including one variation pattern type. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 235A to 235C shown in C) are set. In step S274 shown in FIG. 51, the hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A, 137B, and 137D shown in FIGS. 18, 19A, and 19C, or the loss fluctuation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIGS. 238B is set, and the variation pattern is determined in step S276 shown in FIG. Thus, by preventing the variation pattern types of the super CS2-1 and super CS3-1 from being set in step S274, in step S276, the super PS3 described as executing the reach selection effect in the above embodiment. -1 to super PS3-4 and super PS4-1 to super PS4-4 are not selected. Then, according to the present modification, by determining the variation pattern type in steps S272 and S273, it is determined whether normal reach or super reach is performed, in other words, whether or not a reach selection effect is executed. In addition, when a reach selection effect is executed, the type of reach effect to be performed thereafter can be determined. As an example, when the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-2 is determined in steps S272 and S273, a reach selection effect is executed along with this, and a mountain reach effect is performed as a reach effect performed thereafter. Will be determined. In addition, since the type of reach effect performed after execution of the reach selection effect is determined on the main board 11 side, the effect control CPU 120 performs the reach performed after execution of the reach selection effect on the effect control board 12 side. It is not necessary to execute the processing of steps S514 to S516 shown in FIG. As a result, on the side of the effect control board 12, it is not necessary to determine the reach effect performed after execution of the reach selection effect without increasing the processing load on the main board 11. An increase in burden can also be prevented. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 51, the processes other than steps S274 and S276, and the decorative pattern variation setting process shown in FIG. 62, the processes other than steps S514 to S516 are performed as described above. Since it is the same as that in the embodiment, its description is omitted.

  When the variation pattern of super PA3-1 to super PA3-8, super PA4-1 to super PA4-8, super PA5-1 to super PA5-4 is determined in step S276, reach selection effect execution is performed. The mountain reach effect is determined as the reach effect to be performed later, and only the effect display for displaying the effect image of the mountain reach effect shown in FIG. 83 (A) may be performed. In step S276, the variation patterns of Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-5, Super PC3-4, Super PB4-1 to Super PB4-4, Super PC4-1, Super PD1-1, and Super PD1-2 are determined. In such a case, the marine reach effect is determined as the reach effect performed after the reach selection effect is executed, and the effect display for displaying the effect image of the marine reach effect shown in FIG. 83 (D) may be performed. . In addition, in step S276, super PB3-6 to super PB3-9, super PC3-4, super PB5-1 to super PB5-4, super PC4-2, super PE1-1, super PE1-2, super PF1- When the variation pattern of 1 is determined, the marine reach effect is determined as the reach effect performed after the reach selection effect is executed, and the effect display for displaying the effect image of the space reach effect shown in FIG. You just have to do it.

  In the above modification, when a reach effect other than the reach effect in normal reach is executed, the reach selection effect is always executed, but it is also possible to execute only the reach effect without executing the reach selection effect. If such a case is also included, as in the above-described embodiment, from the viewpoint of preventing an increase in the processing burden on the main board 11, the determination of the reach effect performed after the reach selection effect is executed is the effect control board 12 It is preferable to carry out on the side. Conversely, the above embodiment includes a case where only the reach effect is executed without executing the reach selection effect, but the reach selection effect is always executed when the reach effect is executed. In this case, from the viewpoint of preventing an increase in the processing burden on the effect control board 12, the determination of the reach effect performed after the reach selection effect execution is performed on the main board 11 side in FIG. It is better to be included in the determination of the variation pattern in step S276 shown in FIG.

  In the embodiment described above, the determination of the reach effect performed after execution of the reach selection effect has been described as being performed on the effect control board 12 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main board 11 It may be performed on the side. As an example, in the determination of the variation pattern type in step S273 shown in FIG. 51, the determination of the reach effect performed after execution of the reach selection effect is performed, and in the determination of the variation pattern in step S276, the reach selection effect is determined. What is necessary is just to make it the determination of the presence or absence of execution. As another example, in the determination of the variation pattern type in step S273, the determination of whether or not to execute the reach selection effect is included, and in the determination of the variation pattern in step S276, the reach selection effect is executed. The determination of reach production to be performed later may be included. Also in the above modification, the reach effect performed after the reach selection effect is performed may be determined on the main board 11 side by the method described above.

In the above embodiment, in the reach selection effect, the description has been made on the assumption that reach images showing a plurality of types of reach effects (reach effects AC) are scroll-displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to this, a reach image showing the same type of reach effect (for example, reach effect C) may be included, and further, it may be included in the reach performance. In addition, as shown in FIG. 82 (E), an effect image for notifying the transition to a special effect mode such as the LIVE mode may also be included. In this case, a reach selection effect that scrolls reach images showing a plurality of types of reach effects is executed, a reach selection effect that scrolls reach images that show the same type of reach effects is executed, or FIG. E) As shown in FIG. 51, whether or not to execute the reach selection effect for scroll display including the effect image for notifying the transition to the special effect mode such as the LIVE mode is determined in step S273 shown in FIG. Or, it may be included in the determination of the variation pattern in step S276 shown in FIG. Alternatively, on the side of the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 determines from among a plurality of types of reach selection effects, for example, based on a predetermined random value after the process of step S516 shown in FIG. You may do it.
In the embodiment described above, the determination of the reach effect other than the reach effect performed after the reach selection effect is executed is included in the determination of the variation pattern in step S276 shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination of the reach effect other than the reach effect performed after execution of the reach selection effect may be performed on the effect control board 12 side. As an example, after the execution of steps S506, S512, and S513 shown in FIG. 62, the effect control CPU 120 may determine from among a plurality of types of reach effects based on a predetermined random value. .
Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 66, it has been described that the notice pattern is determined regardless of the type of reach effect executed in the decorative symbol variation display. The invention is not limited to this, and the type of the notice pattern type determination table set in step S591 shown in FIG. 66 or the selection thereof corresponding to the type of reach production determined in step S516 shown in FIG. By changing the ratio or changing the type or selection ratio of the notice pattern discrimination table set in step S595 shown in FIG. 66, the notice pattern is determined by displaying the decorative pattern in a variable manner. You may make it carry out in relation to the kind of reach production.
Moreover, in the said embodiment, although reach effect A to C performed after reach selection effect differs in the whole effect image, this invention is not limited to this, It recognizes that a player is different reach effect. There may be only a difference as much as possible, for example, the character image that appears may be the same and only the background image may be different, or the character image that appears with the same background image may be different. Good. Alternatively, the player may be able to recognize different reach effects by changing the fluctuation direction and the fluctuation speed.

  In the embodiment described above, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 executes the process of step S593 and the process of step S595 shown in FIG. The determination as to whether or not to execute the action and the presentation action as the notice effect are determined to be any of a plurality of types, and the processing of steps S504, S505, and S506 shown in FIG. 62, and step S510 shown in FIG. By executing the processing of S512 and S513, and further the processing of step S558 shown in FIG. 64 and the processing of step S576 shown in FIG. 65, the decorative symbol display areas 5L for “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. It has been described that the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at 5C and 5R are determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an effect operation that becomes a notice effect during variable display of decorative symbols by a plurality of CPUs mounted on a plurality of control boards provided to control the effect operation, for example. The determination as to whether or not to execute, and the determination of any one of a plurality of types of effect operations as a notice effect and the determination of the decorative symbols to be stopped may be performed in a shared manner.

  As an example, a display control board 16 as shown in FIG. 87 is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5. On the display control board 16, a display control CPU 140, a ROM 141, a RAM 142, a random number circuit 143, and an I / O 144 are mounted. In this case, since the display control CPU 140 mounted on the display control board 16 executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, it is mounted on the effect control board 12 in the above embodiment. The displayed control unit 123 may not be provided. In the display control board 16, for example, the display control CPU 140 executes a program read from the ROM 141, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by displaying the effect image in the image display device 5. At this time, the display control CPU 140 reads fixed data from the ROM 141, the display control CPU 140 writes various variation data to the RAM 142 and temporarily stores them, and the display control CPU 140 stores the RAM 142 in the RAM 142. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading various variation data temporarily stored, display operation CPU 140 receiving operation for receiving input of various signals from outside of display control board 16 via I / O 144, display control CPU 140 I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the display control board 16 via O144 is also performed.

  In this case, the display control CPU 140, for example, based on the display control command from the effect control board 12 or the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the effect control board 12, the process of step S593 shown in FIG. By executing the process of step S595, it is determined whether or not to perform an effect operation that becomes a notice effect during variable display of decorative symbols, and determination of which of a plurality of kinds of effect operations that become a notice effect. You may make it perform. Alternatively, the display control CPU 140 performs the processing in steps S504, S505, and S506 shown in FIG. 62, the processing in steps S510, S512, and S513 shown in FIG. 63, the processing in step S558 shown in FIG. 64, and the step S576 shown in FIG. All or part of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by executing at least a portion of the processing of May be determined. The display control CPU 140 may execute any part of the processes executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above embodiment. The sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 may be connected to the effect control board 12 by wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal and an electrical decoration signal from the effect control board 12. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, a process for comprehensively controlling the effect operation may be executed by the effect control CPU 120.

  Further, the functions of the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are provided in the voice control circuit and the lamp control circuit mounted on the effect control board 12 so that independent control to be the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 is performed. The substrate may not be provided. In the above-described embodiment, in the configuration shown in FIG. 2, the sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are not equipped with a microcomputer including a control CPU and the like, but the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. Thus, processing for controlling various effects such as output control of sound and sound effects and lighting control of lamps, decoration LEDs, and the like is performed. On the other hand, in the configuration shown in FIG. 2, the processing executed by the CPU 120 for effect control in the above embodiment by the microcomputer mounted on the sound control board 13 or the microcomputer mounted on the lamp control board 14 is performed. Any part of them may be executed. Thus, when a plurality of control boards are provided to control the rendering operation, the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the control of the audio output operation in the speakers 8L and 8R. The process for determining the control content of various effect operations, such as the process for determining the content and the process for determining the control content of the lighting operation in the game effect lamp 9 or the like, is executed on any control board. Any combination may be used.

  In the above embodiment, in the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 11, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination for the jackpot type of “surprise” The case where -1 is not assigned has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. May be. In this case, the number of random hit values MR2-1 for jackpot type determination assigned to the jackpot type of “probability” is made different depending on whether the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. Thus, when determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition, and determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied. Depending on the case, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “accurate” may be different.

  In the above embodiment, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> A to 135 </ b> C, the variation patterns classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the decorative display variable display state has reached the reach state. The table data has been described as being configured so that it can be determined as one of the types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the table can be determined as any one of the variation pattern types classified according to the type of a predetermined effect operation such as a specific effect of “Development Opportunity” and a promotion effect during change. Data may be configured.

  In the above embodiment, it has been described that in the start winning memory display area 5H, blue display is performed when the first start condition is satisfied, and red display is performed when the second start condition is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a round symbol is displayed when the first starting condition is satisfied, and a triangular symbol is displayed when the second starting condition is satisfied. The symbol may be displayed. Alternatively, a number indicating the number of times each of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied may be displayed in an identifiable manner.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. 30B in step S554 of FIG. 64, and the specific effect patterns of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3. In the above description, it is assumed that the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is set to any one of “1” to “3” depending on which one is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is determined when the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern in step S276 shown in FIG. It may be. In this case, a different special figure variation time can be set according to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation. As described above, for the case where the special figure change time changes depending on the presence or absence of the production operation, the presence or type of the production operation is determined on the main board 11 side, and the special figure fluctuation time does not change depending on the presence or absence of the production operation. With respect to the effect control board 12, the presence / absence and type of the effect operation may be determined.

  In the above embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice pattern type in step S593 shown in FIG. 66, after determining the notice pattern type including the presence or absence of the notice effect, the notice is notified in step S596. In the case of determining the pattern, the description has been given on the assumption that the notification pattern is determined including the presence or absence of the notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence / absence of the notice effect, the type of the notice pattern and the decision of the notice pattern may be determined in a single process. If it is determined that there is an effect, the type of the notice effect may be determined.

  In the above embodiment, when the production control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol of the reach combination in step S506 shown in FIG. 62, it stops in alignment with the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The decorative symbols to be displayed are determined, and the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. It was explained that the difference in design was also determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative symbol display area 5C stops display, and the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R stop display. For example, the CPU 103 may determine the design difference from the decorative design on the main board 11 side along with the determination of the variation pattern, and notify the effect control board 12 side by a predetermined effect control command.

  In the above embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol of the non-reach combination in step S505 shown in FIG. 62, refer to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left and right appearance determination table 161. In the above description, the determined decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are individually determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after determining the fixed decorative symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, the determined decorative symbol and the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas are displayed. You may make it determine the symbol difference with the fixed decoration symbol in 5C, 5R with reference to a predetermined | prescribed determination table.

  In the above embodiment, when executing the changing promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 as shown in FIG. 36 in step S576 shown in FIG. When the symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 are determined so that the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 become the determined decorative symbols that constitute the normal jackpot combination, the determined decorative A description has been given assuming that a normal symbol different from the symbol can be determined as a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the changing promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 become a fixed ornament symbol constituting a normal jackpot combination, the same normal symbol as the fixed ornament symbol However, it may be determined as a decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the changing promotion effect. As an example, in the temporary stop symbol determination table 169, any of the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 is displayed. In the case of the above, all of the random numbers SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the promotion effect are assigned to any of the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” that are the same as the final stop symbol. The table data only needs to be configured so that the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 are the same as the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3. .

  In the above embodiment, as the variation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 47, the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 51 is executed regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. Explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied, a process different from each other is executed, and the variation pattern type is selected from a plurality of types. It is also possible to determine whether or not one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. In this case, the process for determining the variation pattern type and the process for determining the variation pattern are varied depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, while the variation pattern type The numerical data indicating the random number value SR3 for determination and the numerical data indicating the random value SR4 for determining the variation pattern are common numerical data regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. May be used.

  For example, as a variation pattern type determination table such as a big hit variation pattern type determination table, a small hit variation pattern type determination table, a reach variation pattern type determination table, or a non-reach variation pattern type determination table, the first start condition and the second Depending on which of the start conditions is satisfied, the allocation of the random value SR3 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type may be prepared in advance. Then, in the variation pattern setting process executed in response to the establishment of the first start condition, a variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the establishment of the first start condition is selected as a use table, and a random value for determining the variation pattern type Based on SR3, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types. On the other hand, in the variation pattern setting process executed in response to the establishment of the second start condition, a variation pattern type determination table that is different from the case in which the first start condition is established according to the establishment of the second start condition. As a use table, the variation pattern type may be determined as one of a plurality of types based on the random value SR3 for variation pattern type determination common to the case where the first start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, regarding the determination processing for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state, different processing is executed when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied. It may be. In this case, the process for determining whether or not to reach the reach state is made different depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, while the numerical data indicating the reach determination random value MR2-2. For example, the common numerical data may be used regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. Further, for example, instead of the process in step S249 shown in FIG. 49 in the above embodiment, as a process of determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types, the case where the first start condition is satisfied and the second start condition Different processing may be executed depending on whether or not is established. In this case, the processing for determining the jackpot type is different depending on whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, while the numerical data indicating the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type For example, the common numerical data may be used regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied.

  In the above-described embodiment, the small hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, and the game state is not changed after the small hit game state ends. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state based on the fact that the big hit type becomes “surprise”, and after the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the positive change state. Explained as being. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the case where the big hit type is “accurate” or the variable display result is “small hit”, A case of “suddenly normal” may be provided. As an example, “suddenly short time” and “suddenly normal” are included in the jackpot type when the variable display result is “big jackpot”. In this case, the jackpot type determination table 131 includes table data that assigns the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type to the “suddenly short” or “sudden normal” jackpot type in accordance with the variable special figure designation buffer value. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that it may be. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly short”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the big hit type is “accuracy”, it is controlled to the short time state. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “suddenly normal”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as when the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the jackpot type is “surprise”, the normal state is controlled. Thereby, a player's expectation with respect to the gaming state controlled after the end of the two round big hit state can be enhanced, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  When such “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” are provided, a variation pattern type and variation pattern different from those other than “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” may be determined. As a result, although the big hit type is “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal”, the same effect operation as in the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state is performed despite being controlled to the 2 round big hit state. It can prevent the player from feeling distrust. In addition, when the big hit type is "Suddenly short" or "Suddenly normal", when the variable display result is "Small hit", or when the big hit type is "Sudden", the common variation pattern type It may be possible to make a decision. As a result, when determining the fluctuation pattern, the big hit type is “Suddenly short” or “Suddenly normal”, or the variable display result is “Small hit” or the big hit type is “Abrupt”. Regardless of whether this is the case, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the game state such as the probability change state or the time-short state can be controlled after the big hit gaming state based on the variable display result being “big hit”. In the probability variation state and the short-time state, it is described that the control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of the game ball entering the second start winning opening and easily establishing the second start condition. . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the probability variation state, the probability variation control is continuously performed, and the advantageous release control that increases the possibility that the game ball enters the second start winning opening is performed. The high base state and the high probability low base state in which the probability variation control is performed but the advantageous release control is not performed may be included. Also, in the short-time state, a low-accuracy base state where the special figure fluctuation time is shortened and advantageous opening control is performed, and a low-accuracy low-base state where the special figure fluctuation time is shortened but advantageous opening control is not performed. May be included. As an example, depending on whether the big hit type is “first probability change” to “third probability change” or “surprise probability”, after the big hit gaming state, the high accuracy high base state and the high probability low base state It may be controlled either. As another example, depending on whether the big hit type is “first probability change” to “third probability change” or “surprise probability”, the high-accuracy high base state and the high-accuracy low base state are You may make it make the ratio controlled to differ mutually.

  When the big hit type is “Crush Probability”, when determining the variation pattern type to be one of multiple types, whether to control to the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state ends Accordingly, different variation pattern types may be determined. As an example, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise” in step S249 shown in FIG. 49, it is determined whether to control to the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state is finished. A determination process is performed to At this time, when it is determined to control to the high-accuracy low base state, the big hit type such as the special CA4-1, the special CB4-1, and the special CC4-1 variation pattern type is “surprise”. A common variation pattern type is determined when the variable display result is “small hit”. On the other hand, when it is decided to control to the high-accuracy high-base state, it is dedicated only when the big hit type is “surprise” such as special CA4-2, special CB4-2, and special CC4-2. The change pattern type may be determined. As a result, when the big hit type is “surprise” and the high probability low base state is reached after the big hit gaming state is finished, the variable display result is displayed as an effect operation during variable display of the decorative pattern or an effect operation in the two round big hit state. After the production operation common to the case of “small hit” is performed, the highly accurate and low base state can be obtained. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprising” and the high hitting high base state is reached after the big hit gaming state is finished, the big hit type is “accurate” as a directing operation during variable display of a decorative symbol or a two round big hit state. After the dedicated performance operation is performed only in the case of “

  In the above embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result command are described as being prepared as separate effect control commands. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it is possible to specify a variation pattern and a variable display result (any one of “losing”, “small hit”, “big hit”, and a big hit type in the case of “big hit”). One kind of effect control command may be used. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands.

  In the above embodiment, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 in step S249 shown in FIG. 49 selects the jackpot type from “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. Based on this determination, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 sets the jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 31B in step S606 shown in FIG. 69, and step S608. In S609, it has been described that it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the determination whether to execute the jackpot promotion effect may be performed by the effect control CPU 120 regardless of the determination result in the CPU 103.

  In the above embodiment, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided in the display area of the image display device 5, and the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided. In the above description, it is assumed that one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed so that the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed on one predetermined effective line. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, three locations of “upper”, “middle”, and “lower” are provided. It is also possible that the decorative symbols can be stopped and displayed, and the finalized decorative symbols that will be the final stopped symbols are stopped and displayed on five or eight active lines.

  In the above embodiment, the specific effect is executed in response to the fact that the variation pattern type is determined as the non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-2 variation pattern type based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. It has been described as being determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-7. That is, it has been described that the presence or absence of the specific effect is determined by determining the variation pattern type using the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the presence or absence of the specific effect may be determined by determining the variation pattern using the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. As an example, the table data of the loss variation pattern determination table 138A is set so that the variation pattern types of non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-2 include the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-1. In this case, at the time when the variation pattern type is determined to be the non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-2 variation pattern type based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the presence / absence of the specific effect is still determined. On the other hand, the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach PA1-1 based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern, while it is determined not to execute the specific effect, while the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach. Execution of a specific effect is determined by being determined as one of PA1-7.

  In the above embodiment, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in response to the game ball being detected by the count switch 23 or the second start port switch 22B, the abnormality notification screen display and abnormality are detected as abnormality notification. It has been described that notification sound output and abnormality notification lighting are all started simultaneously. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the content of the notification in the abnormality notification may be varied according to the number of game balls detected as an abnormal winning. As an example, when an abnormal winning is detected at the big winning opening or the second starting winning opening, when one game ball is detected at the large winning opening, or detected at the second starting winning opening. When there are five game balls, only abnormality notification sound is output as abnormality notification. Next, when the number of game balls detected at the grand prize opening as an abnormal prize becomes two, or when the number of game balls detected at the second start prize opening becomes ten, an abnormality notification is given. In addition to sound output, abnormality notification is performed by abnormality notification lighting. Further, when the number of game balls detected at the grand prize opening as an abnormal prize becomes three, or when the number of game balls detected at the second start prize opening becomes 15, abnormal alarm sound In addition to the output and abnormality notification lighting, abnormality notification by displaying the abnormality notification screen may be performed. In this case, for example, in the processing of steps S532 and S534 shown in FIG. 71, the number of receptions of the first abnormal winning notification designation command and the second abnormal winning notification designation command is counted, and an abnormal notification corresponding to the count result is issued. What is necessary is just to make a setting. Moreover, you may alert | report abnormality by a predetermined number or more winning. In this case, an abnormal winning notification designation command may be transmitted when a predetermined number of winnings are determined.

  In addition, it is a case where it is determined that an abnormality has occurred due to the detection of a game ball that has entered the grand prize winning opening, or an abnormality has occurred due to the detection of a gaming ball that has entered the second starting winning opening. The correspondence relationship between the number of game balls detected as an abnormal prize and the notification content in the abnormality notification may be varied depending on whether or not it is determined that the game has been performed. As an example, if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred due to the detection of a game ball that has entered the big prize opening, even if the number of game balls detected as an abnormal winning is one, The display of the abnormality notification screen, the output of the abnormality notification sound, and the abnormality notification lighting are all started simultaneously. On the other hand, if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred because the game ball that has entered the second start winning opening is detected a predetermined number of times, the number of game balls detected as an abnormal winning may be five. For example, only the abnormality notification sound is output, and if the number is 10, the abnormality notification lighting is performed in addition to the output of the abnormality notification sound. If the number is 15, the abnormality notification sound is output and the abnormality is detected. An abnormality notification screen may be displayed in addition to the notification lighting.

  In the above-described embodiment, as the abnormality notification, the display of the abnormality notification screen, the output of the abnormality notification sound, and the abnormality notification lighting are all performed in combination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, any one of the display of the abnormality notification screen, the output of the abnormality notification sound, and the abnormality notification lighting may be performed as the abnormality notification, or a part thereof is combined. Abnormality notification may be performed. In this case, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred due to the detection of the game ball that has entered the grand prize winning opening, and when the game ball has entered the second start winning opening has been detected a predetermined number of times, The operation performed as abnormality notification may be made different depending on the case where it has been determined that it has occurred.

  As an example, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred due to the detection of a game ball that has entered the winning prize opening, abnormality notification is performed by combining the display of the abnormality notification screen and the output of the abnormality notification sound. Thus, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred due to the game ball entering the second start winning opening being detected a predetermined number of times, an abnormality notification that combines the output of the abnormality notification sound and the abnormality notification lighting is performed. You may do it.

  As another example, if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred due to the detection of a game ball that has entered the winning prize opening, the display of the abnormality notification screen, the output of the abnormality notification sound, and the abnormality notification lighting are combined. When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred because the game ball that has entered the second start winning opening is detected a predetermined number of times, only the output of the abnormality notification sound is performed as the abnormality notification. You may be made to be.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment can be given a predetermined game value to a player mainly when a special symbol stop symbol variably displayed on the variable display unit based on the start winning is changed to a predetermined symbol. A pachinko machine that can be given a predetermined gaming value to a player when there is a prize in a predetermined area of an electric game that is released based on a start prize, or a start prize The present invention is applied even to a pachinko game machine in which a predetermined right is generated or continued when there is a prize for a predetermined electric combination that is released when the stop symbol of the symbol variably displayed becomes a predetermined symbol combination. it can. Furthermore, in a slot machine 1001 as shown in FIG. 88 in which a game medal is inserted and a bet number is set and a game is performed, or in a game machine in which a game ball is inserted instead of a game medal to set a bet and play a game. The present invention can also be applied.

  The front door of the slot machine 1001 shown in FIG. 88 can be opened by inserting a key into the locking device 1019 and rotating it clockwise. On the upper front side of the slot machine 1001, a variable display device 2 corresponding to a winning variable display device is provided. The variable display device 1002 includes a reel unit 1003. A liquid crystal display 1004 corresponding to the variable display device is provided below the variable display device 1002 and at a substantially central position on the front side of the slot machine 1001. On the left side of the liquid crystal display 1004, a payout display unit 1021, a credit display unit 1022, a bonus notification unit 1036, a replay display unit 1032, a start display unit 1030, an insertion instruction display unit 1029, and a hit display are displayed from the top. Part 1034 is provided. On the right side of the liquid crystal display 1004, there are provided winning display portions 1025a to 1025d and watermelon consecutive winning number display portions 1025e to 1025g. A medal slot 1013, a single BET button 1014, a MAXBET button 1015, and a checkout button 1016 are provided on the horizontal surface of the trapezoidal portion provided below the liquid crystal display 1004. On the vertical surface of the trapezoidal portion, there are provided a start lever 1011, stop buttons 1012L, 1012C, 1012R, and a medal clogging elimination button 1018 that mechanically vibrates the slot machine 1001 when a medal is jammed. ing. A medal payout port 1071 and a medal storage tray 1072 are provided on the lower front side of the slot machine 1001. Speakers 1007L and 1007R are provided on the left and right sides of the variable display device 1002, respectively, as rendering means. On the front side of the slot machine 1001, game effect display units 1005A to 1005E are provided so as to surround the variable display device 1002 and the liquid crystal display 1004. In such a slot machine 1001, the reach selection effect may be executed by displaying an effect image in the reach selection effect on the variable display device 1002.

  Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in advance a computer It is possible to adopt a form distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Discharge control board 16 ... Display control board 19 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate Switch 22A, 22B ... Start-up switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Operation button 51 ... Discharge motor 100 ... Microcomputer 101, 121, 141 for game control ROM
102, 122, 142 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124, 143... Random number circuits 105, 125, 144... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit 140 ... Display control CPU
150 ... microcomputer for payout control

Claims (1)

A variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, and a specific display in which the variable display result of the identification information is predetermined After the result, a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player,
Pre-decision means for deciding whether to control to the specific gaming state based on the establishment of the start condition after the start condition is established, before the variable display result of the identification information is derived and displayed; ,
Based on the determination result by the pre-determining means and the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the variable display pattern type, the variable display pattern type of the identification information is a plurality of types of reach variable display pattern types for performing the reach effect. Variable display pattern type determining means for determining any one of a plurality of types of non-reach variable display pattern types that do not execute the reach effect;
Corresponding to the execution of the reach effect, one of a plurality of reach variable display patterns included in one reach variable display pattern type is determined based on numerical data indicating a random value for variable display pattern determination. On the other hand, in response to not executing the reach effect, a plurality of types of non-reach variable display patterns included in one non-reach variable display pattern type based on numerical data indicating random values for variable display pattern determination. Variable display pattern determining means for determining any of them;
In accordance with the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means, the variable display pattern of the identification information is executed, and when the variable display pattern is a reach variable display pattern, the effect execution means for executing the reach effect,
With
The production execution means
When the reach selection effect for confirming and displaying one reach image of the plurality of types of reach images after sequentially displaying the plurality of types of reach images indicating the reach effect and when the reach selection effect is executed Then, after the end, execute the reach effect indicated by the reach image that is confirmed and displayed in the reach selection effect,
The variable display pattern type determining means determines any one of a plurality of variable display pattern types including a reach variable display pattern type for executing the reach selection effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images